Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_N
Third Edition V1
2020 GRAND CHEROKEE
2020 GRAND CHEROKEE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................ 10
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 90
4 SAFETY ..........................................................................................................................................119
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 181
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 281
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE .......................................................................................316
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 372
9 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................384
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................472
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................477
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...............................11
Essential Information ..................................11
Symbols ........................................................11
ROLLOVER WARNING .........................................11
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................12
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............13
KEYS ......................................................................14
Key Fob......................................................... 14
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................18
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................18
Vehicle On Message ................................... 19
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED..........................................................20
How To Use Remote Start ...........................20
Remote Start Abort Message......................21
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 21
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without
Driving The Vehicle ..................................... 21
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle .......................................................... 22
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped ................................................... 22
General Information ....................................22
SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 23
Key Programming ....................................... 23
Replacement Keys ..................................... 23
Irregular Operation ...................................... 23
General Information .................................... 24
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................... 24
To Arm The System ..................................... 25
To Disarm The System ............................... 25
Rearming Of The System............................. 26
Security System Manual Override .............. 26
Tamper Alert................................................. 26
DOORS................................................................... 26
Manual Door Locks...................................... 26
Power Door Locks ....................................... 27
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry .......... 27
Locking The Doors With One Or More
Doors Open .................................................. 31
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ............... 31
Auto Relocking — If Equipped .................... 31
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors .................................................. 31
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS —
IF EQUIPPED ......................................................... 32
Programming The Memory Feature............ 33
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ........................... 33
Memory Position Recall............................... 33
SEATS.....................................................................34
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 34
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 36
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 37
Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 39
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped ........ 40
HEAD RESTRAINTS...............................................41
Supplemental Active Head Restraints —
Front Seats................................................... 41
Adjustment — Rear Seats............................ 43
Head Restraint Removal — Rear Seats...... 43
STEERING WHEEL.................................................44
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................. 44
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering
Column — If Equipped ................................. 45
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ....... 45
MIRRORS ..............................................................46
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped....... 46
Automatic Dimming Mirror —
If Equipped................................................... 46
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 47
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
If Equipped................................................... 47
Power Mirrors .............................................. 48
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
Power Folding Outside Mirrors —
If Equipped ................................................... 48
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .....................49
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse (Available
With Memory Settings Only) —
If Equipped ................................................... 49
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors .......................... 49
EXTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................50
Headlight Switch .........................................50
Multifunction Lever...................................... 51
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped ................................................... 51
High/Low Beam Switch ............................... 51
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped.......... 51
Flash-To-Pass ............................................. 52
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ..........52
Parking Lights And Panel Lights ................. 52
Headlights On Automatically With
Wipers...........................................................52
Headlight Delay............................................52
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 53
Fog Lights — If Equipped .............................53
Turn Signals .................................................53
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............. 53
Battery Saver................................................53
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................53
Courtesy Lights ............................................54
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS............. 55
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 55
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 57
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 58
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED ............ 58
CLIMATE CONTROLS ........................................... 58
Automatic Climate Controls Overview ....... 59
Climate Control Functions........................... 64
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ...... 65
Operating Tips ............................................. 65
WINDOWS............................................................. 67
Power Window Controls .............................. 67
Auto-Down Feature ..................................... 67
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection .................................................... 68
Reset Auto-Up .............................................. 68
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 68
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 69
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED .................... 69
Opening Sunroof.......................................... 69
Closing Sunroof............................................ 70
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 70
Sunshade Operation.................................... 70
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 70
Venting Sunroof — Express ......................... 70
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 70
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH
POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED..........................71
Opening Sunroof.......................................... 71
Closing Sunroof ........................................... 72
Wind Buffeting ............................................. 72
Opening Power Shade................................. 72
Closing Power Shade................................... 72
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 73
Venting Sunroof — Express ......................... 73
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 73
HOOD......................................................................73
To Open The Hood....................................... 73
To Close The Hood....................................... 74
LIFTGATE................................................................74
Opening ........................................................ 74
Closing.......................................................... 75
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ..................... 75
Cargo Area Features ................................... 77
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED..........78
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink®.................................................. 79
Canadian/Gate Operator
Programming ............................................... 81
Using HomeLink®........................................ 82
Security ........................................................ 82
Troubleshooting Tips................................... 82
General Information .................................... 83
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........................................83
Storage ......................................................... 83
Cupholders ..................................................85
Electrical Power Outlets ..............................85
Power Inverter — If Equipped......................88
Sunglasses Bin Door ...................................88
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED .............88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER........................................90
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 91
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER................................92
SRT Instrument Cluster Descriptions .........93
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .......................94
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ........................................................ 94
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped.................. 95
Display Menu Items..................................... 96
Instrument Cluster Display Messages........97
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 98
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions (If Equipped) .................................104
TRIP COMPUTER................................................ 105
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES................106
Red Warning Lights ...................................106
Yellow Warning Lights ...............................109
Yellow Indicator Lights ..............................113
Green Indicator Lights...............................114
White Indicator Lights ...............................115
Blue Indicator Lights..................................116
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM —
OBD II ..................................................................117
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity................................117
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ............................118
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................119
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................119
Electronic Brake Control (EBC)
System .......................................................120
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.........................131
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — I
f Equipped..................................................131
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation ...................................................136
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................................138
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 143
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....143
Important Safety Precautions...................143
Seat Belt Systems ....................................144
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...153
Child Restraints .........................................162
Transporting Pets ......................................177
SAFETY TIPS....................................................... 177
Transporting Passengers ..........................177
Exhaust Gas...............................................178
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle ....................................178
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ........................180
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 181
Automatic Transmission............................181
Normal Starting .........................................181
If Engine Fails To Start ..............................184
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) .........................185
After Starting..............................................185
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ....... 185
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
NON-SRT ............................................................ 185
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
SRT ..................................................................... 186
PARKING BRAKE .............................................. 186
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ......................... 188
Ignition Park Interlock ...............................189
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System .......................................................189
Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode .......................190
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission .....190
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED.......................... 196
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION.................... 196
Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ........................196
Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Precautions — If Equipped ........................197
Shift Positions ............................................197
Shifting Procedures ...................................198
Quadra-Drive II System — If Equipped......200
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 201
Description .................................................201
Air Suspension Modes...............................203
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......204
Operation....................................................204
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED...................... 205
Selec-Terrain Mode Selection...................205
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......206
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED (SRT) ...............206
Custom .......................................................207
Active Damping System.............................207
Launch Control...........................................207
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L
ONLY — IF EQUIPPED.........................................209
POWER STEERING .............................................209
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED............210
Automatic Mode.........................................210
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................210
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................211
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................211
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................212
System Malfunction...................................212
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ....................212
To Activate..................................................212
To Set A Desired Speed ............................213
To Vary The Speed Setting .......................213
To Accelerate For Passing ........................214
To Resume Speed ....................................214
To Deactivate ............................................214
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................... 214
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Operation ...................................................216
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)...........................................................216
To Activate/Deactivate..............................217
To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................217
To Cancel ...................................................218
To Turn Off .................................................218
To Resume .................................................218
To Vary The Speed Setting .......................218
Setting The Following Distance In ACC ....220
Overtake Aid...............................................221
ACC Operation At Stop...............................221
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........221
Display Warnings And Maintenance ........222
Precautions While Driving With ACC.........223
General Information ..................................225
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode ..........................................................226
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 228
ParkSense Sensors ...................................229
ParkSense Display.....................................229
ParkSense Warning Display......................231
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........232
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................232
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............232
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....232
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED ..................................... 234
ParkSense Sensors ...................................235
ParkSense Display.....................................235
ParkSense Warning Display......................238
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........238
Service The ParkSense Park Assist
System........................................................239
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............239
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....239
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 241
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
Active Park Assist System .........................241
Parallel Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display......................................242
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance
Operation/Display......................................247
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED .............................252
LaneSense Operation................................252
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................252
LaneSense Warning Message ..................253
Changing LaneSense Status.....................255
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA..............255
REFUELING THE VEHICLE..................................257
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release ........258
VEHICLE LOADING .............................................258
Certification Label .....................................258
TRAILER TOWING...............................................260
Common Towing Definitions .....................260
Trailer Hitch Classification ........................262
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) — Non SRT .........263
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) — SRT .................264
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(Summit Models) — If Equipped................264
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
(SRT Models) — If Equipped......................265
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......................266
Towing Requirements ...............................267
Towing Tips ................................................269
SNOW PLOW.......................................................270
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ......................................... 271
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................271
Recreational Towing — Two Wheel Drive
Models........................................................272
Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
Four-Wheel Drive Models..........................272
Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II/
Quadra–Drive II Four-Wheel Drive
Models........................................................273
DRIVING TIPS ..................................................... 276
On-Road Driving Tips.................................276
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .................... 281
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED.... 281
General Information ..................................285
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................ 286
Replacement Bulbs ..................................286
Bulb Replacement.....................................289
FUSES.................................................................. 292
General Information ..................................292
Underhood Fuses ......................................293
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING........................ 298
Run Flat Tires.............................................299
Jack Location .............................................299
Spare Tire Stowage ..................................299
Preparations For Jacking ..........................299
Jacking Instructions ..................................300
Road Tire Installation ................................305
JUMP STARTING ................................................ 305
Preparations For Jump Start.....................306
Jump Starting Procedure...........................307
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY –
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 308
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 308
MANUAL PARK RELEASE ................................. 309
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................. 311
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 312
Two-Wheel Drive Models...........................313
Four-Wheel Drive Models ..........................314
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......314
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE — SRT............ 315
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 315
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 315
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING....................................316
Scheduled Servicing — Non-SRT...............316
Scheduled Servicing — SRT ......................320
ENGINE COMPARTMENT...................................327
3.6L Engine................................................327
5.7L Engine................................................328
6.2L Supercharged Engine .......................329
6.4L Engine................................................330
Checking Oil Level ....................................331
Adding Washer Fluid .................................331
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................331
Pressure Washing......................................332
DEALER SERVICE ..............................................332
Engine Oil ..................................................332
Engine Oil Filter ........................................335
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .........................335
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................337
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ...............340
Body Lubrication........................................340
Windshield Wiper Blades .........................341
Exhaust System .........................................344
Cooling System ..........................................345
Brake System.............................................349
Automatic Transmission............................350
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................351
Transfer Case ............................................351
RAISING THE VEHICLE.......................................351
TIRES................................................................... 352
Tire Safety Information..............................352
Tires — General Information .....................356
Tire Types ...................................................361
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................362
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................363
Tire Chains and Traction Devices —
Non-SRT .....................................................364
Tire Chains and Traction Devices —
SRT .............................................................365
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............366
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 366
Treadwear ..................................................367
Traction Grades .........................................367
Temperature Grades .................................367
STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 368
BODYWORK........................................................ 368
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .....368
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........368
Preserving The Bodywork..........................369
INTERIORS.......................................................... 370
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................370
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................370
Leather Parts .............................................371
Glass Surfaces ..........................................371
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA ...................................... 372
Vehicle Identification Number ..................372
BRAKE SYSTEM ................................................. 372
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS................................................ 372
Torque Specifications................................372
FUEL REQUIREMENTS....................................... 373
3.6L Engine .............................................373
5.7L Engine ................................................374
6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine .......374
Reformulated Gasoline .............................374
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................374
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends......................375
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ......................................................375
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...375
MMT In Gasoline........................................376
Fuel System Cautions................................376
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................376
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT........................ 377
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT................................. 378
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT........... 379
Engine.........................................................379
Chassis ......................................................381
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT.................... 382
Engine.........................................................382
Chassis ......................................................383
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ........................................384
CYBERSECURITY ................................................384
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................385
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings ..................................386
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings .................402
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION...........418
Safety Guidelines.......................................418
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY ..............419
Introduction................................................419
Radio Mode................................................420
Media Mode ...............................................428
Phone Mode...............................................435
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED...................447
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................448
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................448
Suspension ................................................449
Pitch & Roll.................................................449
Accessory Gauges......................................450
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................450
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED ........................................................451
Radio Operation.........................................451
Media Mode ...............................................451
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 451
Connecting The iPod® Or External
USB Device.................................................451
Using This Feature.....................................452
Second Row USB Charging Port ...............452
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED......................... 453
Getting Started ..........................................453
Dual Video Screen.....................................454
Blu-ray™ Disc Player..................................454
Play Video Games......................................455
Play A DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc Using The
Touchscreen Radio....................................456
Important Notes For Dual Video Screen
System........................................................457
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Remote Control —
If Equipped.................................................457
Headphones Operation.............................458
Controls ......................................................459
Replacing The Headphone Batteries .......459
Accessibility — If Equipped........................460
Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty.....................................................460
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ............................................................. 463
Regulatory And Safety Information ..........463
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS ..................................................................... 465
Introducing Uconnect ................................465
Get Started.................................................466
Basic Voice Commands.............................466
Radio ..........................................................466
Media..........................................................467
Phone .........................................................467
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped .................467
Climate .......................................................468
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped...........468
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped ..................469
Do Not Disturb ...........................................469
Android Auto™ — If Equipped ...................469
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped .................470
General Information ..................................471
Additional Information...............................471
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ..........................................472
Prepare For The Appointment...................472
Prepare A List.............................................472
Be Reasonable With Requests .................472
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................472
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................473
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........473
In Mexico Contact ......................................473
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ............473
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ................473
Service Contract .......................................473
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..............................474
MOPAR PARTS ...................................................474
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 474
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................474
In Canada...................................................475
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 475
Radio Frequency Statement............................ 476
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles, both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle is designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for
a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to operate this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case operation. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or operating the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any
content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If
Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant
improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
ESSENTIAL INFORMATION
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the
information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment
ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your
vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
SYMBOLS
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate
precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to
“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center
of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better
in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if
this vehicle is out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the
universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,
000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million
annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
1
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures
that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle.
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display: Feature not available while the vehicle
is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon & symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for
playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the
year, in real-time, so it is never out of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it
to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP
push button ignition system. The Remote
Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature (if equipped).
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system.
NOTE:
With ignition on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob
Key Fob With Emergency Key
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and the security alarm will arm (if
equipped).
The turn signal lights will flash twice to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will be activated.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button
This feature lets you program the system to
unlock either the driver's door or all doors on
the first push of the unlock button on the key
fob. To change the current setting, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — PANIC Button
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry”
located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will
chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” located in “Multimedia” for
further programmable information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry,
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry”
located in “Doors” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” for further information.
If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
again automatically if the key is left inside the
passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
will stay locked.
Replacing The Battery In The Key With
Remote Control
The recommended replacement battery is one
CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the
mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and pull the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of
the emergency key, a #2 flat blade
screwdriver, or a coin and gently pry the two
halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not
to damage the seal during removal.
Emergency Key Removal
Separating Case With A Coin
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
a table or similar and replace the battery.
When replacing the battery, match the +
sign on the battery to the + sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
clean it with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
NOTE:
Black Keys (6.4 L) must be replaced with Black
Keys and Red Keys (6.2 L) must be replaced
with Red Keys.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change with the
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available
1 — OFF
2 — ACC
3 — ON/RUN
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
(Continued)
(Continued)
ON/RUN
Driving position
All the electrical devices are available
START
The engine will start
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information.
VEHICLE ON MESSAGE
When opening the driver's door with the ignition
in ON/RUN (engine not running), a chime will
sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the
message will display “Ignition Or Accessory On”
in the cluster.
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof
(if equipped) will remain active up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking
brake, place the engine in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting system also activates the
Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in
temperatures above 80°F (26.7°C), the
optional heated seats, and optional heated
steering wheel in temperatures below 40°F
(4.4°C). Refer to “Seats” in this chapter for
further information.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the
Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (time out) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be manually started with a
push of the START/STOP ignition button after
two consecutive time outs.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in the OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted Timer Expired
Remote Start Aborted Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The instrument cluster display message stays
active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
TO ENTER REMOTE START MODE
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash
twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat
the start sequence for a third cycle.
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
W
ITHOUT DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Push and release the Remote Start button one
time or allow the remote start cycle to complete
the entire 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start system, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE AND
D
RIVE THE VEHICLE
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the heated
steering wheel and driver heated seat features
will automatically turn on in cold weather. In
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature
will automatically turn on when the remote start
is activated.
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start or until the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The Auto Comfort system can be activated and
deactivated through the Uconnect system. For
more information on Comfort System operation,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will shut the
engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an
invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of
these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
KEY PROGRAMMING
Key fob programming is performed at an
authorized dealer.
REPLACEMENT KEYS
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
IRREGULAR OPERATION
The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node
Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a
Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will shut the
engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is
used to start the engine.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after placing the
keyless ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
problem with the electronics. In addition, if the
light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone used an invalid key fob
to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut
off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized
operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
If something triggers the alarm, the vehicle
security alarm will provide the following audible
and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to "Doors" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" for further informa-
tion.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry door handle to
unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting
To Know Your Vehicle" for further informa-
tion.
Place the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm. Use of the
door key cylinder when the alarm is armed
will sound the alarm when the door is
opened.
The vehicle security alarm remains armed
when the power liftgate is opened using the
liftgate button on the key fob. If someone
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and
opens any door from the inside, the alarm will
sound.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to
unlock the liftgate, the vehicle security alarm
is disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors
will remain locked unless “Unlock All Doors
1st Press” is selected in the Passive Entry
settings.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm, regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, five seconds
between cycles, up to eight cycles if the trigger
remains active and the vehicle security alarm
will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
TAMPER ALERT
If something has triggered the vehicle security
alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three
times and the exterior lights will blink three
times when you disarm the vehicle security
alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked
from inside the vehicle by using the door lock
knob. To lock each door, push the door lock
knob on each door trim panel downward. To
unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim
panel upward. If the lock knob is down when the
door is closed, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
vehicle security alarm.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and leave the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the
keys are found inside the car when the door
lock button on the trim is used to lock the door.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door
may not unlock automatically.
At the third attempt, the doors will lock even if
the key is inside.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened
from inside the vehicle without first unlocking
the door. The door may be unlocked manually
by raising the lock knob.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows
you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off;
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the vehicle Passive Entry system if it is
located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the Passive Entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time
duration is set between 0, 30 (default),
60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also
initiates two flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and (if equipped) will arm
the security alarm.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all four
doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are five situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive entry
vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When the vehicle security alarm is in pre-arm
or armed status and the liftgate transitions
from open to closed.
When the liftgate transitions from open to
closed and remote start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the
customer.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle within 5 ft. (1.5 m) of a Passive
Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button will lock the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect
System, the key protection described in
"Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive
Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is unlocked, the liftgate will
open with the handle and no key fob is
required.
If the vehicle is locked, and the liftgate is
unlocked by using Passive Entry, the vehicle
doors will remain locked (unless “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press” is selected in the Passive
Entry settings).
The liftgate (and vehicle doors if unlocked)
must be locked using the lock button on the
key fob, the Passive Entry lock button, or the
lock buttons on the interior front door panels.
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry
Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located on the outside liftgate door
handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
release.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
LOCKING THE DOORS WITH ONE OR
M
ORE DOORS OPEN
If the door lock switch is pushed while the
ignition is in ACC or ON/RUN and the driver's
door is open, the doors will not lock.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks after the following
sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTO RELOCKING — IF EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/
disabled in the Uconnect Settings.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
pull up on the door lock knob (unlocked posi-
tion), roll down the window, and open the
door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two
different memory profiles for easy recall
through a memory switch. Each memory profile
contains desired position settings for the
following features:
Driver seat
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
Side mirrors
Power tilt and telescopic steering column (if
equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs,
each can be linked to either memory position
1 or 2.
Be sure to program the radio presets prior to
programming the memory seats.
The memory settings switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two saved memory profiles.
Memory Switch
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN
position (do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power tilt
and telescopic steering column [if
equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, and then push the desired
memory button (1 or 2) within five seconds.
The instrument cluster display will display
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one
of two saved memory profiles by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fobs you must
select the “Memory Linked To Fob” feature
through the Uconnect system settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
To program your key fobs, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select a desired memory profile, 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push
and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch.
4. Within five seconds, push and release
button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fobs can be unlinked from your
memory settings by pushing the set (S) button,
and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in
PARK, a message will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or
two, push the desired memory button number
(1 or 2) or the unlock button on the key fob
linked to the desired memory position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
When a recall is canceled, the driver's seat and
telescopic steering column (if equipped) will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by
the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar
located under the seat cushion and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
you have reached the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
only while the vehicle is parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
when the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Manual Front Passenger Seatback
Adjustment — Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Lever
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature —
If Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor
position, lift the recline lever and push the
seatback forward. To return to the seating
position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving
is dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. The
seat belt might not be properly adjusted,
and you could be severely injured or killed.
Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is
parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the seat belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision, you could
slide under the seat belt and be severely
injured or killed. Use the recliner only when
the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat's path.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
Reclining Rear Seat
To recline the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back and
release the lever at the desired position. To
return the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward
and release the lever.
Rear Seat Recline
To Lower Rear Seat
Either side of the rear seat can be lowered to
allow for extended cargo space and still
maintain some rear seating room.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and
positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat-
back to fold down easily.
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release
the seat.
Rear Seat Release
NOTE:
Do not fold the 60% rear seat down with the
left outboard or rear center seat belt buckled.
Do not fold the 40% rear seat down with the
right outboard seat belt buckled.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair
visibility or become a dangerous projectile in
a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
2. Fold the rear seat completely forward.
Rear Seat Folded
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
To Raise Rear Seat
Raise the rear seatback and lock it into place. If
interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have
difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way
power driver and front passenger seats. The
power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat
cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch; the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle
(with the rear seatbacks in the locked-up or
folded down position) should not be used
as a play area by children when the vehicle
is in motion. They could be seriously injured
in a collision. Children should be seated
and using the proper restraint system.
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position
has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch
forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may also be equipped with
power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is
located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or
downward on the switch will raise and lower the
position of the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
against your chest. In a collision you could
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat
or impede its ability to move as it may cause
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
become limited if movement is stopped by an
obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9
of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile. Refer to “Driver Memory
Settings — If Equipped” in this chapter for
further information.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The
Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later
disabled) through the programmable features
in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may
be equipped with heaters located in the seat
cushions and seatbacks.
Front Heated Seats
The front heated seat control buttons are
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. The indicator arrows in the
touchscreen buttons indicate the level of heat
in use. Two indicator arrows will illuminate for
HI, and one for LO.
Turning the heating elements off will return the
user to the radio screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated seats can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the two rear outboard seats
may be equipped with heated seats. There are
two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently.
The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
You can choose from HI, LO, or OFF heat
settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none
for OFF.
Push the switch once to turn the HI setting
on.
Push the switch a second time to turn the
LO setting on.
Push the switch a third time to turn the
heating elements off.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the
operator changes it.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — IF
E
QUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds, HI and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
You can gain access to the control buttons
through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the ventilated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the
top of the head restraint is located above the
top of your ear.
SUPPLEMENTAL ACTIVE HEAD
R
ESTRAINTS — FRONT SEATS
Active Head Restraints (AHR) are passive,
deployable components, and vehicles with this
equipment cannot be readily identified by any
markings, only through visual inspection of the
head restraint. The AHRs will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to reduce the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
design to reduce the risk of injury to the driver
or front passenger in certain types of rear
impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems”
in “Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be
tilted forward and rearward. To tilt the head
restraint closer to the back of your head, pull
forward on the bottom of the head restraint.
Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from
your head.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see an authorized dealer.
In the event of deployment of an Active Head
Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems/Resetting Active Head Restraints
(AHR)” in “Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants.
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a colli-
sion.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
ADJUSTMENT — REAR SEATS
The head restraints on the outboard seats are
not adjustable. They automatically fold forward
when the rear seat is folded to a load floor
position, but do not return to their normal
position when the rear seat is raised.
After returning either seat to its upright position,
raise the head restraint until it locks in place.
The outboard head restraints are not
removable.
Returning Rear Head Restraint
The center head restraint has limited
adjustment. Lift upward on the head restraint to
raise it, or push downward on the head restraint
to lower it.
HEAD RESTRAINT REMOVAL — REAR
S
EATS
The center head restraint can be adjusted when
occupied, or removed for Child Seat Tethering.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go by pulling upward. Then, push the
release button at the base of the post while
pulling the head restraint upward.
Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is
deployed.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push
downward.
Then, adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
Center Head Restraint Release Button
NOTE:
For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer
to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for
further information.
STEERING WHEEL
MANUAL TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column.
The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the
steering wheel at the end of the steering
column.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious
injury or death in a collision. Always make
sure the outboard head restraints are in
their upright positions when the seat is to
be occupied.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
To unlock the steering column, push the lever
downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
column, move the steering wheel upward or
downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock
the steering column in position, push the lever
upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
C
OLUMN — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
power tilt/telescoping steering column lever is
located below the multifunction lever on the
steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or
down as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
steering column, pull the lever toward you or
push the lever away from you as desired.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory
Settings, you can use your key fob or the
memory switch on the driver's door trim panel to
return the tilt/telescopic steering column to
pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver
Memory Settings — If Equipped” in this section
for further information.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the climate or controls screen of
the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
MIRRORS
INSIDE DAY/NIGHT MIRROR — IF
E
QUIPPED
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
AUTOMATIC DIMMING MIRROR — IF
E
QUIPPED
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s rear view.
You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the
button at the base of the mirror. A light in the
button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Button
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be
moved either forward or rearward to resist
damage. The hinges have three detent
positions:
Full forward position
Full rearward position
Normal position
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
controlled by the inside automatic dimming
mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther
away than they really are. Relying too much
on side convex mirrors could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object.
Use your inside mirror when judging the size
or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex
mirror.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver's side door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
switch. To adjust a mirror, push the mirror select
button for the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of
the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switch
Power mirror preselected positions can be
controlled by the optional Driver Memory
Settings Feature. Refer to “Driver Memory
Settings — If Equipped” in “Getting To Know
Your Vehicle” in this chapter for further
information.
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can
be electrically folded rearward and unfolded
into the drive position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the
mirrors will fold in, push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after electrically
cycled, a potential extra button push is required
to get the mirrors back to the home position. If
the mirror does not electrically fold, check for
ice or dirt build up at the pivot area which can
cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Automatic Power Folding Mirrors
When the Automatic Fold Mirrors feature is
enabled, the exterior mirrors will fold in when
exiting the vehicle (the ignition is OFF, all doors
are closed, and the doors are locked).
If the exterior mirrors were auto-folded, they
will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
ON position.
If the exterior mirrors were manually folded,
they will not automatically unfold.
1 — Mirror Direction Control
2 — Right Mirror Selection
3 — Left Mirror Selection
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
NOTE:
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature is
not turned on when delivered from the factory.
The Automatic Fold/Unfold Mirrors feature can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this chapter for further information.
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE
(A
VAILABLE WITH MEMORY SETTINGS
O
NLY) — IF EQUIPPED
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
outside mirror positioning which will aid the
driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
doors. Outside mirrors will move slightly
downward from the present position when the
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors
will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature is not
turned on when delivered from the factory. The
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will
turn on automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional
sun blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while
the sun visor is against the windshield for addi-
tional sun blockage through the front of the
vehicle.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel, next to the steering
wheel. The headlight switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, cargo lights, and fog
lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also turned
on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the
headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
light and fog light (if equipped) lenses that
are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be
followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid
wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt,
wash with a mild soap solution followed by
rinsing.
1 — Rotate Headlight Switch
2 — Push Front Fog Light
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive
materials to clean the lenses.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
Multifunction Lever
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
Non-SRT Vehicles
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) (low
intensity) come on whenever the engine is
running, and the transmission is not in the
PARK position. The lights will remain on until the
ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC position, or
the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate or reduce intensity on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
The DRLs function may be disabled through
the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
SRT Vehicles
The DRLs (bright intensity) come on whenever
the engine is running, and the transmission is
not in the PARK position. The lights will remain
on until the ignition is placed in the OFF or ACC
position or the parking brake is engaged.
The headlight switch must be used for normal
nighttime driving.
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction back
toward the steering wheel will turn the low
beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
inside rearview mirror. This camera detects
vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the
approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto High Beam” within your Ucon-
nect settings, as well as turning the headlight
switch to the AUTO position. Refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function
improperly.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror
must be re-aimed to ensure proper
performance. See a local authorized dealer.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
to the A (auto) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay
feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place
the ignition switch in the OFF position. To turn
the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight
switch out of the A (auto) position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
HEADLIGHTS ON AUTOMATICALLY WITH
W
IPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
Headlights, it also has this
customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn
on when the wiper system is on. This feature is
programmable through the Uconnect system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive
Wiper System” and it is activated, the
headlights will automatically turn on after the
wipers complete five wipe cycles within
approximately one minute, and they will turn off
approximately four minutes after the wipers
completely stop.
Refer to “Windshield Wipers And Washers” in
this chapter for further information.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the
daytime, the instrument panel lights will auto-
matically dim to the lower nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with
a headlight delay that will leave the headlights
on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This
delay is initiated when the ignition is turned OFF
while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay
can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by placing the ignition in
the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
The headlight delay feature is automatically
activated if the headlight switch is left in the
A (auto) position when the ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound when the driver’s
door is opened.
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the
headlight switch to the parking light or headlight
position and pushing in the headlight rotary
control.
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking
lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are
on low beam. An indicator light located in the
instrument cluster will illuminate when the fog
lights are on.
The fog lights will turn off when the switch is
pushed a second time, when the headlight
switch is rotated to the off position, or the high
beam is selected.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
BATTERY SAVER
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
shedding is provided for both the interior and
exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all
the way up to the dome on position for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically
turn off.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened or when the dimmer
control (rotating wheel on the right side of the
headlight switch) is rotated to its farthest
upward position. If your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is
pushed on the key fob, the courtesy and dome
lights will turn on.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control all the way
down, to the last (off) detent, will cause all the
interior lights to go out. This is also known as
the “Party” mode because it allows the doors to
stay open for extended periods of time without
discharging the vehicle’s battery.
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pushing
the top corner of the lens. To turn the lights off,
push the lens a second time.
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
The front map/reading lights are mounted in
the overhead console.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Each light can be turned on by pushing a switch
on either side of the console. These buttons are
backlit for night time visibility. To turn the lights
off, push the switch a second time. The lights
will also turn on when the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry key fob is pushed.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Ambient Light — If Equipped
The overhead console is equipped with an
ambient light feature. This light casts
illumination for improved visibility of the floor
and center console area.
Ambient Light
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
Dimmer Controls
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting
can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control
up (brighter) or down (dimmer). When the
headlights are on you can supplement the
brightness of the instrument cluster display,
radio and overhead console by rotating the
control to the first detent up until you hear a
click. This feature is termed the “Parade” mode
and is useful when headlights are required
during the day. Rotating the dimmer control up
to the second detent, the furthest position up,
turns on the courtesy lights. This feature is
known as “Dome On”.
Dimmer Control
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering column. The front wipers are
operated by rotating a switch, located on the
end of the lever. For information on the rear
wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Wiper/
Washer” in this section.
Multifunction Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
four detent positions for intermittent settings,
the fifth detent for low wiper operation and the
sixth detent for high wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the
windshield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings
when weather conditions make a single wiping
cycle, with a variable delay between cycles,
desirable. At driving speeds above 10 mph
(16 km/h), the delay can be regulated from a
maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every
one second (fourth detent).
Intermittent Wiper Operation
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever
(toward the steering wheel) and hold while
spray is desired. If the lever is pushed while in
the intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on
and operate for several wipe cycles after the
end of the lever is released, and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
Windshield Washer Operation
If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers
are in the off position, the wipers will operate for
several wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
Mist
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
make occasional usage of the wipers
necessary. Rotate the end of the lever
downward to the MIST position and release for
a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers for the driver. The feature is especially
useful for road splash or overspray from the
windshield washers of the vehicle ahead.
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one
of four settings to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position four is the most sensitive.
NOTE:
Wiper delay position three should be used for
normal rain conditions.
Settings one and two can be used if the driver
desires less wiper sensitivity. Setting four can
be used if the driver desires more sensitivity.
Place the wiper switch in the OFF position when
not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the igni-
tion is first placed in the ON position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When
the ignition is ON, and the automatic trans-
mission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain
Sensing system will not operate until the
wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is
greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the gear
selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL
position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the multifunction lever on the left side of the
steering column. The rear wiper/washer is
operated by rotating a switch, located at the
middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper
operation.
Rotating the center portion upward
once more will activate the washer
pump which will continue to operate
as long as the switch is held.
Upon release of the switch, the wipers will
resume the continuous rear wiper operation.
When this rotary control is in the OFF position,
rotating it downward will activate the rear
washer pump which will continue to operate as
long as the switch is held. Once the switch is
released it will return to the OFF position and
the wipers will cycle several times before
returning to the parked position.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds.
Once the switch is released the pump will
resume normal operation.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will
automatically return to the “park” position.
HEADLIGHT WASHERS — IF EQUIPPED
The headlight washers are integrated into the
windshield washer and can be operated by the
multifunction lever when the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the headlights are turned
on. The multifunction lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
To use the headlight washers, push the
multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
column) and release it. The headlight washers
will spray a timed high-pressure spray of washer
fluid onto each headlight lens. In addition, the
windshield washers will spray the windshield
and the windshield wipers will cycle.
NOTE:
After turning the ignition switch and headlights
on, the headlight washers will operate on the
first spray of the windshield washer and then
every eleventh spray after that.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROLS OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate
Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C setting is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator illuminates when Recirculation is on. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used
in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create
fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Faceplate Auto Button
Touchscreen Auto
Button
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by adjusting the
blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and release this button
on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator illuminates when AUTO is on.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” in this section for further information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the windshield
and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system will return to the previous setting.
Icon Description
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear
window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is
on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the touchscreen.
Icon Description
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist
outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Icon Description
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Icon Description
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The A/C (Air Conditioning) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool
dehumidified air will flow through the outlets
into the cabin. For improved fuel economy,
press the A/C button to turn off the air
conditioning and manually adjust the blower
and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to
select only Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Climate Control OFF
Faceplate Button
Climate Control OFF
Touchscreen Button
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the faceplate, to turn the Climate Control
system ON/OFF.
Icon Description
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system
lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started
again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to , on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set
the mode control to
the position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in
position.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate only when the ignition is in the ACC
or ON/RUN position.
If equipped, the key fob may also be used to
raise or lower vehicle windows while the ignition
is in the OFF position. Refer to “Keys” in this
chapter for further information.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is program-
mable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
AUTO-DOWN FEATURE
The driver door power window switch and the
front and rear passenger door window switches
have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for half a second
and release. The window will go down
automatically.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control
to position and
turn on to keep
windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the position. If
windshield fogging
starts to occur, move
the control to the
position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
AUTO-UP FEATURE WITH ANTI-PINCH
P
ROTECTION
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
NOTE:
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle and
use the window switch again to close the
window.
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpect-
edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull
the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the
window controls, push and release the window
lockout button again (the indicator light on the
button will turn back off).
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
(Continued)
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
OPENING SUNROOF
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward to full open. Any release of the switch
will stop the movement. The sunroof and
sunshade will remain in a partially opened
condition until the sunroof switch is pushed
again.
CLOSING SUNROOF
Express
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is
called “Express Close”. During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Manual
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch
in the forward position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunroof
will remain in a partially closed condition until
the sunroof switch is pushed again.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
then open the front and rear windows together
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually.
However, the sunshade will open automatically
as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
closing of the sunroof during the Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS
Push and release the Vent button within one
half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent” and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
COMMANDVIEW SUNROOF WITH POWER
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED
The CommandView sunroof switch is located to
the left between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
The power shade switch is located to the right
between the sun visors on the overhead
console.
CommandView Sunroof And Power Shade Switches
OPENING SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed automatic
stops for the sunroof open position; a comfort
stop position and a full open position. The
comfort stop position has been optimized to
minimize wind buffeting.
Express
Push the switch rearward and release it within
one-half second. The sunroof will open
automatically to the comfort stop position. Push
the switch rearward and release it again, the
sunroof will open to the full open position and
automatically stop. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the
sunroof.
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
rearward. The sunroof will stop automatically at
the comfort stop position. Push and hold the
switch rearward again, the sunroof will open to
the full open position and automatically stop.
Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will
remain in a partially opened condition until the
switch is pushed and held rearward again.
1 — Sunroof Switch
2 — Power Shade Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power sunroof
while operating the power sunroof switch.
Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated
the sunshade will automatically open to the half
open position prior to the sunroof opening.
CLOSING SUNROOF
Express Close
Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
automatically from any position. During Express
Close operation, any other actuation of the
sunroof switches will stop the sunroof in a
partially open position.
Manual Close
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunroof will close from any position and stop at
full closed position. Releasing the switch while
the sunroof is in motion will stop the sunroof in
a partially open position.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears.
Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This is
a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If
the buffeting occurs with the rear windows
open, then open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust
the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting
or open any window.
OPENING POWER SHADE
The sunshade has two programmed positions:
half open and full open positions. When
operating the sunshade from the closed
position, the sunshade will always stop at the
half open position regardless of express or
manual open operation. The switch must be
actuated again to continue on to full open
position.
Express Open
Push the sunshade switch rearward and
release it within one-half second, the sunshade
will open to the half open position and stop
automatically.
Push and release the switch again from the half
open position and the sunshade will open to the
full open position and stop automatically.
During Express Open operation, any other
actuation of the sunroof switches will stop the
sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open
Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward,
the sunshade will open to the half open position
and stop automatically. Push and hold the
sunshade switch again and the sunshade will
open to the full open position. Releasing the
switch while the sunshade is in motion will stop
the sunshade in a partially open position.
CLOSING POWER SHADE
If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at
half open position will first automatically close
the sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
Express Close
Push the sunshade switch forward and release
it within one-half second and the sunshade will
close automatically. During Express Close
operation, any other actuation of the sunroof
switches will stop the sunshade in a partially
open position.
Manual Close
Push and hold the switch forward and the
sunshade will close and stop at full closed
position. Releasing the switch while the
sunshade is in motion will stop the sunshade in
a partially open position.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
VENTING SUNROOF — EXPRESS
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
vent position. This is called “Express Vent”, and
it will occur regardless of sunroof position.
During Express Vent operation, any movement
of the switch will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when
the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will
automatically cycle to the halfway open position
prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent posi-
tion.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be
released.
1. Pull the release lever located underneath
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach under the hood, move safety latch to
the left and lift the hood.
Safety Latch Location
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Pull down on the center of the hood until it
falls on its own.
2. Confirm that both the primary and
secondary latches are engaged. If only the
secondary latch is engaged, open the hood
12 inches (30 cm) from the engine
compartment and apply enough force to
engage both the primary and secondary
latches.
LIFTGATE
OPENING
The liftgate can be opened from inside the
vehicle using the power liftgate button on the
overhead console. The liftgate can be opened
from the outside using the key fob or the
electronic liftgate release.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate may be released in several ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the electronic
liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
Push the button on the key fob twice within five
seconds to release the liftgate.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed in
Uconnect, all doors will unlock when you push
the electronic release on the liftgate. If "Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press" is programmed in Ucon-
nect, only the liftgate will unlock when you push
the electronic release on the liftgate. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Passive Entry/Lock Button Location
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release
2 — Lock Button Location
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE:
Use the power door lock switch on either front
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock
the liftgate. The manual door locks on the doors
and the driver's door lock cylinder will not lock
and unlock the liftgate.
CLOSING
To manually close the liftgate, grasp the liftgate
closing handle and initiate the lowering of the
liftgate. Release the handle when the liftgate is
partially closed and the momentum will fully
close the liftgate.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button located
next to the outside handle release will lock the
vehicle.
The power liftgate may be closed by pushing the
button, located in the upper left trim in the
liftgate opening. Pushing the button will only
close the liftgate. This button cannot be used to
open the liftgate.
NOTE:
The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec-
tronic liftgate release.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the electronic liftgate release
(refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry” located in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further information), or
by pushing the liftgate button on the key fob.
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice
within five seconds to open the power liftgate.
Once the liftgate is open, pushing the button
twice within five seconds a second time will
close the liftgate.
NOTE:
When using the liftgate button on the key fob
to open the liftgate while the vehicle is
locked, only the liftgate will unlock leaving
the other doors to remain locked. Closing the
liftgate will not re-lock the liftgate. The lock
button on the key fob, or the Passive Entry
lock button must be pushed to re-lock.
When using the Passive Entry button to open
the liftgate, and the vehicle doors unlock (if
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is selected in the
Passive Entry settings), the liftgate and
vehicle doors must be locked using the lock
button on the key fob, the Passive Entry lock
button, or the lock buttons on the interior
front door panels.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the
front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully
open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the
liftgate button located on the left rear trim
panel, near the liftgate opening. If the liftgate is
in motion, pushing the liftgate button located on
the left rear trim panel will reverse the liftgate.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if
Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled in the
Uconnect settings), and the liftgate chime will
be audible. Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in
"Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
In the event of a power malfunction to the lift-
gate, an emergency liftgate latch release can
be used to open the liftgate. The emergency
liftgate latch release can be accessed
through a snap-in cover located on the lift-
gate trim panel.
If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate func-
tionality.
NOTE:
The power liftgate will not operate in
temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or
temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure
to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power lift-
gate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while
it is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open posi-
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
There are also pinch sensors attached to the
side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere
along these strips will cause the liftgate to
return to the open position.
If the liftgate is not fully open, push the lift-
gate button on the key fob twice to operate
the liftgate.
If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is closing, the liftgate
will reverse to the full open position.
If the electronic liftgate release is pushed
while the power liftgate is opening, the lift-
gate motor will disengage to allow manual
operation.
If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop and the lift-
gate must be opened or closed manually.
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate
travel path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is
closed and latched before driving away.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Storage Bins
There are up to four removable storage bins
located in the rear cargo area. There are two
storage bins located on either side of the cargo
area.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear
subwoofer, the storage bin on that side will not
be available.
Rear Storage Bin
Two additional storage bins are located under
the load floor. To access the lower storage bins,
raise the load floor and attach the tether strap
(attached to the bottom of the load floor) to the
liftgate opening.
Tether Strap
Rear Lower Storage Bins
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If
Equipped
NOTE:
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from
shifting or protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull
it over the cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into
the slots in the pillar trim cover.
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
cover in place.
Rear Cargo Cover
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
The rear cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo
area floor, should be used to safely secure
loads when the vehicle is moving.
Rear Cargo Tie-Downs
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the
vehicle could cause injury. It could fly around
in a sudden stop and strike someone in the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the
cargo floor or in the passenger compartment.
Remove the cover from the vehicle when
taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors
for a child seat tether strap. In a sudden
stop or accident, a hook could pull loose
and allow the child seat to come loose. A
child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and
passengers can change the vehicle center of
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of
control resulting in personal injury, follow
these guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads which exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to
sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the
overhead console, designate the three different
HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink®
indicator is located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal
it is recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that
were manufactured after 1995. These garage
door openers can be identified by the “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
5. On the garage door opener (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink ®Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps."
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers
manufactured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you press and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink®
indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons after the
indicator light changes from slow to rapid.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some US gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal.
The indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are
programming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the Home-
Link® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been
previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
USING HOMELINK®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the orange
indicator flashes. Note that all channels will be
erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming
HomeLink®, here are some of the most
common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Opened Glove Compartment
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door
panels for easy access.
Door Panel Storage
Console Features
The center console contains both an upper and
a lower storage area.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull
upward on the small latch located on the lid.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to
access the lower storage compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
Your vehicle may have an optional CD or DVD
player located in the center console.
Lower Storage Compartment CD/DVD Player — If
Equipped
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/
reading lights and storage for sunglasses.
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®),
power liftgate and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
CUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders for the front seat
passengers located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders for the rear seat
passengers located in the fold-down center
armrest.
Rear Cupholders
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (15 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located inside the
storage area on the center stack of the
instrument panel. Push inward on the storage
lid to open the compartment and gain access to
this power outlet.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the storage area
of the center console.
Center Console Outlet
The rear power outlet is located in the right rear
cargo area.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
NOTE:
The rear power outlet can be switched from
“ignition” only to constant “battery” powered all
the time. See your local authorized dealer for
details.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
(Continued)
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — F104 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
Console Bin
2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet
Right Rear Quarter Panel
3 — F93 Fuse 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts.
NOTE:
Certain high-end video game consoles, new
computers and power tools will exceed this
power limit.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet, the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
SUNGLASSES BIN DOOR
At the front of the console, a compartment is
provided for storing a pair of sunglasses. The
storage compartment access is a “push/push”
design. Push the chrome pad on the door to
open. Push the chrome pad on the door to
close.
Sunglasses Bin Door
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to
carry loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage
rack. The load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg),
and should be uniformly distributed over the
luggage rack crossbars.
NOTE:
If not equipped with crossbars, an authorized
dealer can order and install Mopar crossbars
built specifically for this roof rack system.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be
sure the total load of cargo inside the vehicle
plus that on the external rack does not exceed
the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
(Continued)
To move the crossbars, loosen the
attachments, located at the upper edge of each
crossbar, approximately eight turns using the
anti-theft wrench provided with the Mopar
crossbars. Then, move the crossbar to the
desired position, keeping the crossbars parallel
to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in the
desired position, retighten with the wrench to
lock the crossbar into position.
NOTE:
To help control wind noise when the cross-
bars are not in use, place the front and rear
crossbars approximately 24 inches (61 cm)
apart. Optimal noise reduction can then be
achieved by adjusting the front crossbar
forward or aft using increments of 1 inch
(2.5 cm).
If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped),
you may experience interruption of satellite
radio reception. For improved satellite radio
reception, avoid placing the rear crossbar
over the satellite radio antenna.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the roof of your
vehicle, do not carry any loads on the roof
rack without the crossbars installed. The
load should be secured and placed on top
of the crossbars, not directly on the roof. If
it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection
between the load and the roof surface.
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity of 150 lbs (68 kg).
Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
Long loads which extend over the wind-
shield, such as wood panels or surfboards,
or loads with large frontal area should be
secured to both the front and rear of the
vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift to a load. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
The use of Sport Mode is not recommended
when using the Roof Luggage Rack to carry
a load.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Instrument Cluster
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 91
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in this chapter for
further information.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
SRT Instrument Cluster
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
SRT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS
1. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
2. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. After an engine
warm up, any reading within 203°F -
230°F (95°C - 110°C) indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
5. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster Display” in this chapter for
further information.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads greater than 230°F
(110°C) pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains above 230°F
(110°C), turn the engine off immediately and
call an authorized dealer for service.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle will be equipped with an
instrument cluster display, which offers useful
information to the driver. With the ignition in the
OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
SRT Instrument Cluster Display Location And Controls
Instrument Cluster Display
The Main Menu items selectable in the driver
interactive display consist of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Terrain — If Equipped
SRT Performance — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen
1 — Driver Interactive Display
2 — Speedometer Display
3 — Main Display
4 — Menu Name And Menu Page
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
Trip
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Diagnostic — SRT
Speed Warning — SRT
The system allows the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
Main Menu items.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/
select the information screens or
submenu screens of a Main Menu
item. Push and hold the OK arrow
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
OIL CHANGE RESET — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the
instrument cluster display for five seconds after
a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer
to the following procedure.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start
the engine).
2. Navigate to “Oil Life” submenu in “Vehicle
Info” in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset
Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
SRT Instrument Cluster Display
Performance Features
The instrument cluster display can be used to
program the following Performance Features.
SRT Performance Features Controls
To access, press and release either the up or
down arrow button until “SRT” appears in the
instrument cluster display, then press and
release the right arrow button to cycle
through the features. Press the OK button to
select a feature.
Uconnect SRT Performance Features
To access the SRT Performance Features,
press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen
then press the “Performance Pages” button
on the touchscreen.
The Performance Page includes the following
menus:
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for
off-highway or track use only and should not
be done on any public roadways. It is
recommended that these features be used in
a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which can jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
Home Gauges 2
Timers G – Force
Gauges 1 Engine
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Traction Control Off
Washer Fluid Low
Oil Pressure Low
Oil Change Due
Fuel Low
Service Anti-lock Brake System
Service Electronic Throttle Control
Service Power Steering
Cruise Control Off
Cruise Control Ready
ACC Driver Override
Cruise Control Set To XXX MPH
Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate
Tire to XX”
Service Tire Pressure System
Speed Warning Set To XXX MPH
Speed Warning Exceeded
Parking Brake Engaged
Brake Fluid Low
Service Electronic Braking System
Engine Temperature Hot
Lights On
Right Front Turn Signal Light Out
Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Left Front Turn Signal Light Out
Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Ignition Or Accessory On
Vehicle Not In Park
Remote Start Active Push Start Button — If
Equipped
Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low — If
Equipped
Remote Start Canceled Door Open — If
Equipped
Remote Start Canceled Hood Open — If
Equipped
Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open — If
Equipped
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired — If
Equipped
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset — If
Equipped
Service Air Bag System
Service Air Bag Warning Light
Door Open
Doors Open
Liftgate Open
Hood Open
Shift Not Allowed
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To D
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To R
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P
Service Transmission
Service Shifter
Service Air Suspension System
Normal Ride Height Achieved
Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved
Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved
Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved
Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved
Selected Ride Height Not Permitted
Service Air Suspension System Immediately
Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride
Height
Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please
Wait
Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open
Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled
Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride
Height
For further information on the color warning and
indicator lights in the instrument cluster, refer
to “Warning Lights And Messages” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel”.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the main menu items for several features.
Use the up and down arrow buttons to scroll
through the driver interactive display menu
options until the desired menu is reached.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
Tachometer With Digital Speedometer
Supplemental Gauge Speedometer
Non - SRT
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the main gauge menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to select
the analog or digital type speedometer display.
Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(mph or km/h — If Equipped) of the
speedometer.
SRT
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the main gauge menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow buttons to change
between large and small speedometer display.
Push and release the OK button to toggle units
(mph or km/h — If Equipped) of the
speedometer.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus and push
and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
Terrain — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the right or left arrow button to display the
Selec-Track or Drivetrain.
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Terrain icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the right or left arrow button to display the
Selec-Terrain, Air Suspension, Drivetrain, and
Wheel Articulation.
SRT
Selec-Track — If Equipped
Drivetrain: Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, Axle
Lock
Non — SRT
Selec-Terrain: Displays messages concerning
Selec-Terrain status.
Air Suspension — If Equipped: Displays
messages concerning Air Suspension status.
Drivetrain: Displays information on drivetrain
status of Front Wheel Angle, T-Case, and Axle
Lock.
Wheel Articulation: Displays current wheel
articulation.
NON — SRT
Tire Pressure Oil Pressure
Transmission
Temperature
Oil Life
Oil Temperature Battery Voltage
SRT
Tire Pressure Oil Life
Coolant Tempera-
ture
Battery Voltage
Storage Mode
— If Equipped
Transmission
Temperature
Intake Air Tempera-
ture
Oil Temperature Engine Torque
Oil Pressure Engine Power
Air/Fuel Ratio – If
Equipped
Boost Pressure — If
Equipped
I/C Coolant
Temperature — If
Equipped
SRT
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Performance Features — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the SRT icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll through
the performance feature submenus.
The Performance Features include the
following:
0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Time — If Selected
0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Time — If Selected
0-60 feet (0-18 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Time — If Selected
1/8 Mile (200 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Time — If Selected
1/4 Mile (400 meters) Timer
Best
Last
Recent
Reaction Time — If Selected
Braking Distance
Distance
From Speed
Current G-Forces
Peak G-Forces
Lap Timer
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the
Performance Features is intended for
off-highway or track use only and should not
be done on any public roadways. It is
recommended that these features be used in
a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which can jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
Lap History
Will list the last four laps with the best lap
highlighted in green.
Top Speed
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC and LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on the
status of ACC and LaneSense.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push and release the SET + or the SET- button
(located on the steering wheel) and the
following will display in the instrument cluster
display:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy Icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy
feature.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle left or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the Range
display will change to a “RANGE LOW”
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “RANGE LOW”
message and a new Range value will display.
Range cannot be reset through the OK
button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since
the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while
driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
Trip information will display the following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop / Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down
arrow button on the steering wheel to
scroll to the Stop/Start menu in the
driver interactive display.
For further information on the use and different
modes of the Stop/Start System, refer to “Stop
/ Start System – If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating”.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio menu title is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow
you to scroll through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Gear Display
Full (default setting)
Single
Upper Left
None
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A
Trip B
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp (default setting)
Time
Range
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A
Trip B
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Cancel
Restore
Current Gear
On
Off (default setting)
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Terrain (show/hide)
SRT Performance Pages (show/hide)
Driver Assist (show/hide)
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (show/hide)
Stop/Start
Audio (show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
Diagnostic Codes — SRT
Speed Warning — SRT
The menu with (show/hide) means user can
press OK button to choose show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
Diagnostics — SRT
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Diagnostics icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to display the diagnostic
trouble codes and descriptions. When the end
of the list is reached, “No or End of Diagnostic
Code” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Speed Warning — SRT
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Speed Warning Menu icon/title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release OK to enter speed warning.
Use the up or down arrow button to select a
desired speed, then push and release OK to set
the speed. The white passive speed limiter
telltale will light up with a notification text
message (Speed Warning Set to XX, followed by
the selected unit). When the set speed is
exceeded, an audible chime will sound until the
speed is no longer exceeded. The white passive
speed limiter telltale will turn yellow and will
flash, and a pop up message of “Speed Warning
Exceeded” will display.
NOTE:
You can turn the Speed Warning off by using the
up/down arrows to scroll through speed list and
select OFF at the bottom of the list.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS (IF EQUIPPED )
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in “Warning Lights And Messages”
located in ”Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can
be effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display (Toggle left or right to
select Trip A or Trip B).
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
To Reset Trip A/B Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function
is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK
button to clear the resettable function being
displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the
information in this chapter in the event of a
failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds.
The light should then turn off unless the parking
brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If
the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning
Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to
“Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an
overheated engine condition. If the
engine coolant temperature is too
high, this indicator will illuminate and
a single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime will
sound for four minutes or until the engine is
able to cool; whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light
This light will turn on when the ACC
system is not operating and needs
service. For further information, refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Starting And Operating.”
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is Active. The “ESC Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
activated. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on
continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system.
If this warning light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches
approximately 2.4 gal (9.1 L) this light
will turn on, and remain on until fuel is
added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel
Warning.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Refer to “Adding Washer Fluid” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for
further information.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required.
We recommend you drive to the nearest service
center and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
Refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” in
“Safety” for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is actively
adjusting the ride height.
Refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light—
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the
vehicle is automatically lowered from
ride height position downward for
easy entry and exit of the vehicle.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height
Indicator Light— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Aerodynamic setting.
Refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 1 setting.
Refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the
Off-Road 2 setting.
Refer to “Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off. Refer to “Forward
Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation” in “Safety” for further information.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive
operation and proper use.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
4WD power transfer case is in the
NEUTRAL mode and the front and rear
driveshafts are disengaged from the
powertrain.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
his light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and
there is no target vehicle detected.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the cruise control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on. Refer
to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs. Refer to
“LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on. Refer to “Exterior Lights” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Snow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Snow
Mode is active. Refer to the Drive
Mode Supplement for further
information.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active. Refer to the Drive
Mode Supplement for further
information.
Sport Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active. Refer to the Drive
Mode Supplement for further
information.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
Tow Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Tow Mode
is active. Refer to the Drive Mode
Supplement for further information.
Track Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Track
Mode is active. Refer to the Drive
Mode Supplement for further
information.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light
— If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) has been turned on, but
not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Custom Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Custom
Mode SRT is active. Refer to the Drive
Mode Supplement for further
information.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature is
turned on. The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC can only be
armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are
not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SRT Speed Warning Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned
on, the speed warning telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
with a number matching the set
speed. When the set speed is exceeded, the
indication will light up yellow and flash along
with a continuous chime. Speed Warning can be
turned on and off in the instrument cluster
display. For further information refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in this chapter.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that can be set.
Speed Warning Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned
on, the speed warning telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster
with a number matching the set
speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a
single chime will sound along with pop up
message of speed warning exceeded.
When the set speed is exceeded by 1.9mph
(3km/h) or more, the indication will light up
yellow and flash along with a continuous chime
(up to ten seconds or until the speed is no
longer exceeded).
Speed Warning can be turned on and off in the
instrument cluster display. For further
information, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel.”
NOTE:
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that can be set.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Selec Speed Control Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when “Selec
Speed Control” is activated.
To activate “Selec Speed Control”, assure the
vehicle is Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Low and push
the button on the Instrument Panel.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in
the instrument cluster display.
Valet Mode SRT Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Valet Mode
is active. Refer to the Drive Mode
Supplement for further information.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic
codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be driveable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
3
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
119
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions.
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound,
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS
activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
NOTE:
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 SAFETY
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic
Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB),
Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dynamic Steering
Torque (DST), Hill Descent Control (HDC), and
Selec-Speed Control (SSC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake
application and then applies optimum pressure
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of the system, you must
apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
SAFETY 121
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) is a feature of
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and
Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that
provides torque at the steering wheel for certain
driving conditions in which the ESC module is
detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the
steering wheel receives is only meant to help
the driver realize optimal steering behavior in
order to reach/maintain vehicle stability.
The only notification the driver receives that the
feature is active is the torque applied to the
steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear axles
by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle.
This is done to prevent overslip of the rear
wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before
the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s
steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving
the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 SAFETY
(Continued)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle
under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” also flashes when the Traction
Control System (TCS) is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
SAFETY 123
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode
may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF”
switch and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushes may
be required to return to ESC On.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on any
public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will
display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
ON/RUN again, momentarily push the “ESC
OFF” switch.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed, the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
“Full Off” can only be achieved in Track Mode (if
equipped).
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins
to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition
is turned ON/RUN.
Each time the ignition is turned ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
SAFETY 125
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
indicates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended
for low speed off road driving while in
4L Range. HDC maintains vehicle
speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4L Range
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
Park brake is released
Driver door is closed
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following
summarizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – if equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 SAFETY
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade
Vehicle is shifted to PARK
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch
The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range
The park brake is applied
Driver door opens
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately)
HDC detects excessive brake temperature
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
when HDC deactivates due to overheated
brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will
activate again once the brakes have cooled
sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake
pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The park brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
SAFETY 127
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
For vehicles not equipped with an instrument
cluster display, perform the following steps:
1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels
pointing straight forward)
2. Shift the transmission into PARK
3. Apply the park brake
4. Start the engine
5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than
one-half turn to the left
6. Push the “ESC OFF” button located in the
lower switch bank below the climate control
four times within 20 seconds. The “ESC OFF
Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off
two times
7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center
and then an additional slightly more than
one-half turn to the right
8. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode and then
back to ON/RUN. If the sequence was
completed properly, the “ESC OFF Indicator
Light” will blink several times to confirm
HSA is disabled
9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this
feature to its previous setting
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 SAFETY
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will
periodically apply a small amount of brake
pressure to remove any water buildup on the
front brake rotors. It functions when the
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
RBS is active, there is no notification to the
driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an
emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The Electronic Brake Control (EBC)
system will prepare the brake system for a
panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a
driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will
apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will
allow more engine power to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in a reduced mode.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
SAFETY 129
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Selec Speed Control (SSC) — If Equipped
Selec Speed Control (SSC) is intended
for off road driving in 4L Range only.
SSC maintains vehicle speed by
actively controlling engine torque
and brakes.
SSC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling SSC
SSC is enabled by pushing the SSC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable SSC:
Driveline is in 4L Range
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
Park brake is released
Driver door is closed
Driver is not applying throttle
Activating SSC
Once SSC is enabled it will activate
automatically once the following conditions are
met:
Driver releases throttle
Driver releases brake
Transmission is in any selection other than
PARK (P)
Vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h)
The set speed for SSC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. Additionally, the SSC set speed may be
reduced when climbing a grade and the level of
set speed reduction depends on the magnitude
of grade. The following summarizes the SSC set
speeds:
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 SAFETY
SSC Target Set Speeds
1st = .6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – if equipped
REVERSE = .6 mph (1 km/h)
NEUTRAL = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
PARK = SSC remains enabled but not active
NOTE:
During SSC the +/- shifter input is used for
SSC target speed selection but will not affect
the gear chosen by the transmission. While
actively controlling SSC the transmission will
shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
SSC performance is influenced by the Terrain
Select mode. This difference may be notable
to the driver and may be perceived as a
varying level of aggressiveness.
Driver Override:
The driver may override SSC activation with
throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating SSC
SSC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides SSC set speed with throttle
or brake application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is shifted to PARK
Disabling SSC
SSC will deactivate and be disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the SSC switch
The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range
The park brake is applied
Driver door opens
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (SSC exits immediately)
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an SSC icon and the
SSC switch has an LED which offer feedback to
the driver about the state SSC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain on solid when SSC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for SSC.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when the
driver pushes the SSC switch but enable
conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
several seconds then extinguish when SSC
disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash
then extinguish when SSC deactivates due to
overheated brakes.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
SAFETY 131
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar sensors, located inside the rear
bumper fascia, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R).
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the
vehicle, near the B-Pillar, and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in random false detections on the
trailer, and false chimes when the turn signal
is used.
The BSM system may experience drop outs
(blinking on and off) of the side mirror
Warning Indicator lamps when a motorcycle
or any small object remains at the side of the
vehicle for extended periods of time (more
than a couple of seconds).
WARNING!
SSC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when driving in off
road conditions. The driver must remain
attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle
speed.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 SAFETY
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the area of the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
Sensor Location
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors. In
addition, when the turn signal is activated
during the alert on the side of the vehicle
corresponding to the alert, an audible (chime)
alert can be heard.
During this audible (chime) alert, the radio
volume will be reduced. Refer to “Modes Of
Operation” in this section for further
information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
SAFETY 133
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
SAFETY 135
Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be issued.
In addition to the audible alert the radio (if on)
will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started, the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 SAFETY
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) with
Mitigation system provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning. If
the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision.
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking
and the system determines that the driver
intends to avoid the collision by braking but has
not applied sufficient brake force, the system
will compensate and provide additional brake
force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 26 mph
(42 km/h), the system may provide the
maximum or partial braking to mitigate the
potential forward collision. If the Forward
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops
the vehicle completely, the system will hold the
vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles, such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within an ignition cycle,
the Active Braking portion of FCW will be
deactivated until the next ignition cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings. If
the vehicle enters 4L Range or ESC “Full Off”
Mode is active, the FCW system will be auto-
matically deactivated.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
SAFETY 137
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the system status is “Warning &
Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than "Medium" setting.
This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting,
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
the distance between the vehicle in the front is
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning”
prevents the system from providing limited
active braking, or additional brake support if
the driver is not braking adequately in the
event of a potential frontal collision, but
maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents
the system from providing autonomous
braking, or additional brake support if the
driver is not braking adequately in the event
of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 SAFETY
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with run flat tires, when
the TPMS indicates a tire pressure of 14 psi
(96 kPa) or lower, always check tire pressure
and replace the tire at the first opportunity. At
inflation pressure of or below 14 psi (96 kPa)
the tire is in the run-flat mode of operation. In
this condition, it is recommended a vehicle
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for a
maximum distance of 50 miles (80 km). The
manufacturer does not recommend using the
run flat feature while driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or towing a trailer.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold tire pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
means that when the outside temperature
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
pressure should always be set based on cold
inflation tire pressure.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
SAFETY 139
(Continued)
This is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least three
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
a three-hour period. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The
tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven — this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low
pressure warning threshold for any reason,
including low temperature effects, or natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above recommended cold tire pressure.
Once the low tire pressure warning has been
illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased
to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the TPMS Warning Light to be turned off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive
this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured
tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa).
This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the
vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the TPMS
Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,
the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after
the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold tire pressure value.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warnings have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 SAFETY
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire gauge, even if under-infla-
tion has not reached the level to trigger illu-
mination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel
rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the Receiver Module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to regularly
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
consists of the following components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Messages, which display in the instrument
cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pres-
sures
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster,
and an audible chime will be
activated, when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display an
"Inflate to XX" message and a graphic display of
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) in a
different color. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
SAFETY 141
NOTE:
Your system can be set to display pressure units
in PSI, BAR, or kPa.
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the
four active road tire(s), you should stop as soon
as possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in
a different color on the graphic display to the
vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will
return to its original color and the TPMS
Warning Light will extinguish once the updated
tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Service TPM System Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and
remain on solid when a system fault is detected.
The system fault will also sound a chime. The
instrument cluster display will display a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a
minimum of five seconds. This message is then
followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place
of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message will not be present, and a pressure
value will be displayed instead of dashes. A
system fault can occur by any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same Radio
Frequencies as the TPM sensors
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM
sensors
NOTE:
There is no tire pressure monitoring sensor in
the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to
monitor the tire pressure. If you install the spare
tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure
below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the
next ignition switch cycle, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will remain
on, a chime will sound, and the instrument
cluster display will still display a pressure value
in the different color graphic display and an
“Inflate to XX” message will be displayed.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 SAFETY
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display
will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value. For each subse-
quent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then remain on solid, and the instrument
cluster display will display a "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message for five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in place
of the spare tire, the TPMS will update automat-
ically.
In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
instrument cluster display will display a new
pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can be deactivated if replacing all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with wheel and
tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors,
such as when installing winter wheel and tire
assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
(TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display dashes (--) in place of the pressure
values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors.
Then, drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition cycle
the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed as long as no system fault
exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
SAFETY 143
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further
information) must be secured in the
appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information.)
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 SAFETY
(Continued)
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
(Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
(Continued)
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under
the “Child Restraints” section of this manual.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
(Continued)
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR)
These head restraints are passive, deployable
components, and vehicles with this equipment
cannot be readily identified by any markings,
only through visual inspection of the head
restraint. The head restraint will be split in two
halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the severity or type of rear
impact will require the Active Head Restraints
(AHR) to deploy. If a rear impact requires
deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the
front half of the head restraint extends forward
to minimize the gap between the back of the
occupant’s head and the AHR. This system is
designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of
injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE:
The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However, if during a front impact, a secondary
rear impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based
on the severity and type of the impact.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
(Continued)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components:
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
NOTE:
For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Head
Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle.”
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Deployed
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered
during a collision, the front half of the head
restraint will be extended forward and
separated from the rear half of the head
restraint (See Image). Do not drive your vehicle
after the AHRs have deployed. The head
restraint must be reset into the original position
to best protect the occupant for all types of
collisions. An authorized FCA US LLC dealer
must reset the AHRs on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat before driving.
Personally attempting to reset the AHRs may
result in damage to the AHRs that could impair
their function.
1 — Head Restraint Front Half (Soft Foam And
Trim)
2 — Head Restraint Back Half (Decorative Plastic
Rear Cover)
3 — Head Restraint Guide Tubes
4 — Seat Back
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a colli-
sion.
Do not place items over the top of the
Active Head Restraint, such as coats, seat
covers or portable DVD players. These
items may interfere with the operation of
the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
Active Head Restraints may be deployed if
they are struck by an object such as a hand,
foot or loose cargo. To avoid accidental
deployment of the Active Head Restraint,
ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose
cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to
follow this warning could cause personal
injury if the Active Head Restraint is
deployed.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
WARNING!
Deployed AHRs are not able to best protect
you in all types of collisions. Have deployed
AHRs reset by an authorized dealer
immediately.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel”
section of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
(Continued)
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine. If
there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an acci-
dent, reset the system by following the proce-
dure described below. If you have any doubt,
contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat.
Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether
the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the
back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located
behind the seating position. These anchorages
are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This
Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower
anchorages from the outboard seating
positions?
No
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
child seat in the center seating position.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraint may be removed in only the
center seating position if it interferes with the
installation of the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in Getting To Know
Your Vehicle for further information.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat. To
access them, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will expose
the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Center Seat LATCH
Vehicle With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rear-facing child restraints secured in the
center seat position with the vehicle seat belts,
the rear center seat position has an armrest
tether that secures the arm rest in the upward
position.
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether,
first lower the arm rest. The tether is
located behind the armrest and hooked
onto the plastic seat backing.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from
the plastic seat backing.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether
hook to the strap located on the front of the
arm rest.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See the section “Installing
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center
position using the LATCH system. This posi-
tion is not approved for installing child
seats using the LATCH attachments. You
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to
install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint.
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compat-
ible Child Restraint” for typical installation
instructions.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat
belts are not toys and that they should not play
with them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
Systems” for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether
Anchor with the seat belt to attach
a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front
passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Can the rear head restraints be
removed?
Yes
The head restraint may be removed
in only the center seating position if
it interferes with the installation of
the child restraint.
Refer to “Head Restraints” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the
belt path of the child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR
retractor.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear
seat can be moved forward and rearward
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor
panel away from the seat back, this will
expose the top tether strap anchorages.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap Anchorage
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located On Seatback)
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the
tether strap over the seatback and headrest
then attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
(Continued)
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Mounting
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible
until the gap panel is folded down. Do not
use the visible cargo tie down hooks,
located on the floor behind the seats, to
attach a child restraint tether anchor.
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH when
using “Track-Use” parts and equipment:
NEVER use any “Track-Use” equipment on
public roads. FCA US LLC does not autho-
rize the use of “Track-Use” equipment on
public roads.
The intended use of “Track-Use” parts is for
race vehicles on race tracks. To help
ensure the safety of the race driver, engi-
neers should supervise the installation of
“Track-Use” parts.
FCA US LLC does not authorize the installa-
tion or use of any part noted as “Track-Use”
on any new vehicle prior to its first retail
sale.
WARNING!
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS remove any “Track-Use” equip-
ment before driving on public roads.
ALWAYS properly use your three-point seat
belts when driving on public roads.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
181
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
PARK (P) position before you can start the
engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into any
driving gear.
NORMAL STARTING
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and apply the
parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node
is in the OFF mode, key fob is removed from
the vehicle and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child
or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and
the engine is at idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after 10
seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the
transmission will automatically select PARK
and the engine will turn off, however the
ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT
the OFF mode). Never leave a vehicle out of
the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once will turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP button
must be held for two seconds (or three short
pushes in a row) to turn the engine off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT
the OFF mode) if the engine is turned off
when the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in
the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and
the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”),
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode (instrument cluster will display
“ON/RUN”),
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
third time to return the ignition to the OFF
mode (instrument cluster will display
“OFF”).
NOTE:
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle
could be reduced if both pedals are pressed at
the same time. If pressure is detected on both
pedals simultaneously, a warning message will
display in the instrument cluster. For further
information, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel”.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
backup system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition switched from RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these
conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P
then Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h).
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a backup system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
4WD LOW — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and on the shifter. As
an added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold
Weather" procedure it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition
key in the RUN position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from
your authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC
electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire
extension cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
3.6L Engine — Coiled and strapped to the
engine oil dipstick tube.
5.7L Engine — Bundled and fastened to the
injector harness.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
NON-SRT
A long break-in period is not required for the
drivetrain (engine, transmission, clutch, and
rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. However, wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle
lubricant installed at the factory are high-quality
and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant
changes should be consistent with anticipated
climate and conditions under which vehicle
operations will occur. For the recommended
viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Fluids And
Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as an indica-
tion of difficulty. Please check your oil level with
the engine oil indicator often during the break in
period. Add oil as required.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
SRT
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining
optimum performance and maximum durability
for your new SRT Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class
manufacturing methods, the moving parts of
the vehicle must still wear in with each other.
This wearing in occurs mainly during the first
500 miles (805 km) and continues through the
first oil change interval.
It is recommended for the operator to observe
the following driving behaviors during the new
vehicle break-in period:
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for
an extended period of time.
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and
not more than halfway to avoid rapid
acceleration.
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than
3,500 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph
(88 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not
more than halfway to avoid rapid accelera-
tion in lower gears (1st to 3rd gears).
Avoid aggressive braking.
Drive with the engine speed less than
5,000 RPM.
Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph
(112 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
Exercise the full engine RPM range, shifting
manually (paddles or gear shift) at higher
RPMs when possible.
Do not perform sustained operation with the
accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph
(136 km/h) and observe local speed limits.
For the first 1,500 miles (2,414 km):
Do not participate in track events, sport
driving schools, or similar activities during
the first 1500 mi (2414 km).
NOTE:
Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be
higher through the first oil change interval.
Running the engine with an oil level below the
add mark can cause severe engine damage.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied and place the gear
selector in the PARK (P) position.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
(Continued)
The foot operated parking brake is located
below the lower left corner of the instrument
panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push
the parking brake pedal fully. To release the
parking brake, press the parking brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the
brake disengage.
Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition switch in the ON mode, the Brake
Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
transmission is placed in gear, the Brake
Warning Light will flash. If vehicle speed is
detected, a chime will sound to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the keyless ignition node is in the OFF
mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle
and lock the vehicle.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter- N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake
Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be
running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL ECONOMY (ECO) M ODE
The Fuel Economy (ECO) mode can improve the
vehicle's overall fuel economy during normal
driving conditions. Push the “ECO” switch in the
center stack of the instrument panel to activate
or disable ECO mode. A light on the switch
indicates when ECO mode is disabled (for
non-SRT models) or enabled (for SRT models).
Fuel Economy Mode Switch (Non-SRT Model)
Fuel Economy Mode Switch (SRT Model)
When the Fuel Economy (ECO) Mode is
engaged, the vehicle control systems will
change the following:
The transmission will upshift sooner and
downshift later.
The overall driving performance will be more
conservative.
Vehicles with Quadra-Lift air suspension will
operate in "Aero" mode over a broader speed
range. Refer to the section on Quadra-Lift for
further information.
In SRT models, the transmission will launch
(from a stop) in second gear, and the torque
converter clutch may engage at lower engine
speeds and remain on longer.
Some ECO mode functions may be tempo-
rarily inhibited based on temperature and
other factors.
Active Noise Cancellation — If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise
Cancellation System. This system uses four
microphones embedded in the headliner to
detect undesirable exhaust noise, which
sometimes occurs when operating in specific
driving conditions such as ECO and Tow mode.
An onboard frequency generator creates
counteracting sound waves through the audio
system to help keep the vehicle quiet.
EIGHT–SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
The transmission gear range is displayed both
beside the gear selector and in the instrument
cluster. To select a gear range, press the lock
button on the gear selector and move the
selector rearward or forward.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), the
engine must be running and the brake pedal
must be pressed. You must also press the brake
pedal to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D)
or REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds. Select the DRIVE range
for normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and MANUAL (M) or SPORT
(S) (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick shift control.
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL or SPORT
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE position),
or tapping the shift paddles (+/-), if equipped,
will manually select the transmission gear, and
will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster. Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for
further information.
Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position).
In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear
(1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument
cluster. Move the gear selector to the right (into
the DRIVE position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)(Continued)
(Continued)
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the ignition OFF.
Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK position (when pushed forward), it is prob-
ably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the trans-
mission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled
Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating
conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
refer to "AutoStick" in this chapter for further
information to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and
transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
MANUAL (M) OR SPORT (S) — IF EQUIPPED
The MANUAL (M, +/-) or SPORT (S, +/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position) enables full manual
control of transmission shifting (also known as
AutoStick mode; refer to “AutoStick” in this
chapter for further information.
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL or SPORT
(AutoStick) position will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current
gear in the instrument cluster.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in certain gears,
or may not shift at all. Vehicle performance may
be severely degraded and the engine may stall.
In some situations, the transmission may not
re-engage if the engine is turned off and
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. A message in the
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the
more serious conditions, and indicate what
actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL (N).
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
When To Use TOW Mode — If Equipped
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent
transmission shifting occurs, select TOW mode,
using the rotary switch on the center console.
Selecting TOW mode will improve performance
and reduce the potential for transmission
overheating or failure due to excessive shifting.
Refer to “Selec-Track” in this chapter for further
information.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) or SPORT (S)
position (beside the DRIVE position), or tap one
of the shift paddles on the steering wheel
(if equipped). Tapping the (-) shift paddle (if
equipped) to enter AutoStick mode will
downshift the transmission to the next lower
gear, while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode
will retain the current gear. The current
transmission gear will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can
use the gear selector (in the MANUAL or SPORT
position), or the shift paddles (if equipped), to
manually shift the transmission. Tapping the
gear selector forward (-) while in the MANUAL or
SPORT position, or tapping the (-) shift paddle
(if equipped), will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear. Tapping the selector
rearward (+) (or tapping the (+) shift paddle, if
equipped) will command an upshift.
NOTE:
The shift paddles (if equipped) may be disabled
(or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect
Programmable Settings or, in SRT models,
using Drive Modes.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver (using the gear selector, or the shift
paddles, if equipped), unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to first gear when coming to a stop. After
a stop, the driver should manually upshift (+)
the transmission as the vehicle is acceler-
ated.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear (or third gear, in 4L range, Snow
mode, or Sand mode). Tapping (+) (at a stop)
will allow starting in second gear. Starting out
in second or third gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the (-) paddle depressed (if
equipped), or holding the gear selector in the
(-) position, will downshift the transmission to
the lowest gear possible at the current
speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+)
shift paddle (if equipped, and the gear selector
is already in DRIVE) until "D" is once again
indicated in the instrument cluster. You can
shift in or out of AutoStick at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED
SPORT Mode Button
Your vehicle is equipped with a SPORT Mode
feature. This mode is a configuration set up for
typical enthusiast driving. The engine,
transmission, and steering systems are all set
to their SPORT settings. SPORT Mode will
provide improved throttle response and
modified transmission shift points for an
enhanced driving experience, as well as a
greater amount of steering feel. This mode may
be activated and deactivated by pushing the
SPORT button on the instrument panel switch
bank.
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
QUADRA-TRAC I OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range
only) transfer case, which provides convenient
full-time four-wheel drive. No driver interaction
is required. The Brake Traction Control (BTC)
System, which combines standard ABS and
Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque
transfer to wheels with traction.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
NOTE:
The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom-
mended. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
QUADRA-TRAC II OPERATING
I
NSTRUCTIONS /PRECAUTIONS — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Quadra-Trac II transfer case is fully
automatic in the normal driving 4WD AUTO
mode. The Quadra-Trac II transfer case provides
three mode positions:
4WD HI
NEUTRAL
4WD LOW
This transfer case is fully automatic in the 4WD
HI mode.
When additional traction is required, the 4WD
LOW position can be used to lock the front and
rear driveshafts together and force the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
The 4WD LOW position is intended for loose,
slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
LOW position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
engine speed is approximately three times that
of the 4WD HI position at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause damage
to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
SHIFT POSITIONS
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each 4WD system mode position, see the
information below:
4WD AUTO
This range is used on surfaces such as ice,
snow, gravel, sand, and dry hard pavement.
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” in this
chapter for further information on the various
positions and their intended usages.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
This range disengages the driveline from the
powertrain. It is to be used for towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It
provides an additional gear reduction which
allows for increased torque to be delivered to
both the front and rear wheels while providing
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
NOTE:
Refer to “Selec-Terrain — If Equipped” for
further information on the various positions and
their intended usages.
SHIFTING PROCEDURES
4WD HI To 4WD LOW
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON
position or the engine running, shift the
transmission into “N”, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case switch.
The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument
cluster will begin to flash and remain on solid
when the shift is complete.
Transfer Case Switch
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 Low Slow Below
3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in “N” Press 4 Low”
message will flash from the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON
position or the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, and push the “4WD
LOW” button once on the transfer case switch.
The “4WD LOW” indicator light in the instrument
cluster will flash and go out when the shift is
complete.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, or a
transfer case motor temperature protection
condition exists, a “For 4x4 High Slow Below
3 mph (5 km/h) Put Trans in NEUTRAL push
4 Low” message will flash from the instru-
ment cluster display. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible
with the vehicle completely stopped;
however, difficulty may occur due to the
mating clutch teeth not being properly
aligned. Several attempts may be required
for clutch teeth alignment and shift comple-
tion to occur. The preferred method is with
the vehicle rolling 0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h).
If the vehicle is moving faster than 3 mph
(5 km/h), the transfer case will not allow the
shift.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with
the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds.
The light behind the NEUTRAL (N) symbol
will blink, indicating shift in progress. The
light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when
the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. A
“NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
6. After the shift is completed and the
NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The
NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the
front and rear drive shafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns
off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn
the ignition to the OFF mode.
14. Release the parking brake only when the
vehicle is securely attached to a tow vehicle.
NOTE:
If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Proce-
dure in Owner’s Manual” message will flash
from the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
8. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been
released, the transfer case will shift to the
position indicated by the selector switch.
QUADRA-DRIVE II SYSTEM — IF
E
QUIPPED
The optional Quadra-Drive II System features
two torque transfer couplings. The couplings
include an Electronic Limited-Slip Differential
(ELSD) rear axle and the Quadra-Trac II transfer
case. The optional ELSD axle is fully automatic
and requires no driver input to operate.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Under normal driving conditions, the unit
functions as a standard axle, balancing torque
evenly between left and right wheels. With a
traction difference between left and right
wheels, the coupling will sense a speed
difference. As one wheel begins to spin faster
than the other, torque will automatically
transfer from the wheel that has less traction, to
the wheel that has traction. While the transfer
case and axle coupling differ in design, their
operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II
transfer case shifting information, preceding
this section, for shifting this system.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system provides
full time load leveling capability along with the
benefit of vehicle height adjustment by the push
of a button. The vehicle will automatically raise
and lower the ride height to adapt to the
appropriate driving conditions. At higher
speeds, the vehicle will lower to an aerodynamic
ride height and when operating in off-road
modes, the vehicle will raise the ride height
accordingly.
The buttons near the terrain switch in the center
console area can be used to set preferred ride
height to match the appropriate conditions.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the stan-
dard position of the suspension and is meant
for normal driving.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approx-
imately 1.1 inches (28 mm)) – This is the
primary position for all off-road driving until
OR2 is needed. A smoother and more
comfortable ride will result. Push the “UP”
button once from the NRH position while the
vehicle speed is below 38 mph (61 km/h).
When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle
speed remains between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater than
20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds
50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be auto-
matically lowered to NRH. Refer to “Driving
Tips” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
1 — UP Button
2 — Off-Road 2 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
3 — Off-Road 1 Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
5 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp
(Customer Selectable)
6 — DOWN Button
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approx-
imately 2.2 inches (55 mm)) – This position
is intended for off-roading use only where
maximum ground clearance is required. To
enter OR2, push the “UP” button twice from
the NRH position or once from the OR1 posi-
tion while vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h). While in OR2, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the vehicle
height will be automatically lowered to OR1.
Refer to “Driving Tips” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately
0.6 inches (15 mm)) – This position provides
improved aerodynamics by lowering the
vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
Aero Mode when the vehicle speed remains
between 52 mph (83 km/h) and 56 mph
(90 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed exceeds 56 mph
(90 km/h). The vehicle will return to NRH
from Aero Mode if the vehicle speed remains
between 20 mph (32 km/h) and 25 mph
(40 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if
the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(32 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero Mode,
regardless of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in
“SPORT” mode.
Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approxi-
mately 1.6 inches (40 mm) – This position
lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the
“DOWN” button once from (NRH) while the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph
(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to
lower. If the vehicle speed remains between
15 mph (24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h)
for greater than 60 seconds, or the vehicle
speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/
Exit Mode change will be cancelled. To exit
Entry/Exit Mode, press the “Up” button once
while in Entry/Exit Mode or drive the vehicle
over 15 mph (24 km/h).
NOTE:
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit
Mode can be enabled through the Uconnect
Touch-Screen Radio. If this feature is enabled,
the vehicle will only lower if the gear selector is
in "PARK", the terrain switch is in "AUTO", the
transfer-case is in "AUTO” and the vehicle level
should be either in Normal or Aero Mode.
The Vehicle will not automatically lower if the air
suspension level is in Off Rd 2 or Off Rd 1. If the
vehicle is equipped with Intrusion Theft Module
(ITM), the lowering will be suppressed when the
ignition is switched OFF and the door is open to
prevent setting the alarm off.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the proper height based
on the position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The
height can be changed from the default
Selec-Terrain setting by normal use of the air
suspension buttons. Refer to “Selec-Terrain” in
“Starting And Operating” for further
information.
The system requires that the engine be running
for all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of
the doors, including the liftgate, must be closed.
If a door is opened at any time while the vehicle
is lowering the change will not be completed
until the open door(s) is/are closed.
The Quadra-Lift air suspension system uses a
lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the
headlights from incorrectly shining into
oncoming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the
rear of the vehicle will move up first and then
the front. When lowering the vehicle, the front
will move down first and then the rear.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed
that the air suspension system operates briefly,
this is normal. The system is correcting the
position of the vehicle to ensure a proper
appearance.
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
Quadra-Lift air suspension system has a feature
which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
For further information refer to “Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” section.
NOTE:
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to “Ucon-
nect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further infor-
mation.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The Air Suspension system has multiple modes
to protect the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
suspension system has a feature which allows
the automatic leveling to be disabled. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the
air suspension system has a feature which
automatically lowers the vehicle to entry/exit
ride height. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Transport Mode
To assist with flat bed towing, the air
suspension system has a feature which will put
the vehicle into Entry/Exit height and disable
the automatic load leveling system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting
allows you to only display suspension warnings.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high
pressure volume of air to operate the system.
To avoid personal injury or damage to the
system, see your authorized dealer for
service.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment this mode
must be enabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with
engine running.
If equipped with a touch screen radio all
enabling/disabling of air suspension features
must be done through the radio. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
OPERATION
The indicator lamps 2 through 5 will illuminate
to show the current position of the vehicle.
Flashing indicator lamps will show a position
which the system is working to achieve.
When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are
flashing on the “UP” button, the highest flashing
indicator lamp is the position the system is
working to achieve. When lowering, if multiple
indicators are flashing on the "DOWN" button
the lowest solid indicator lamp is the position
the system is working to achieve.
Pushing the “UP” button once will move the
suspension one position higher from the
current position, assuming all conditions are
met (i.e. engine running, speed below
threshold, etc). The “UP” button can be pushed
multiple times, each push will raise the
requested level by one position up to a
maximum position of OR2 or the highest
position allowed based on current conditions
(i.e. vehicle speed, etc).
Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the
suspension one position lower from the current
level, assuming all conditions are met (i.e.
engine running, doors closed, speed below
threshold, etc). The “DOWN” button can be
pressed multiple times. Each push will lower the
requested level by one position down to a
minimum of Park Mode or the lowest position
allowed based on current conditions (i.e.
vehicle speed, etc.)
Automatic height changes will occur based on
vehicle speed and the current vehicle height.
The indicator lamps and instrument cluster
display messages will operate the same for
automatic changes and user requested
changes.
Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 2, 3, and
4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in
OR2.
Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3 and 4
will be illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.
Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamp 4
will be illuminated when the vehicle is in this
position.
Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be
illuminated when the vehicle is in Entry/Exit
Mode. If Entry/Exit Mode is requested while
vehicle speed is between 15 mph (24 km/h)
and 25 mph (40 km/h), indicator lamp 4 will
remain on solid and indicator lamp 5 will
flash as the system waits for the vehicle to
reduce speed. If vehicle speed is reduced to,
and kept below, 15 mph (24 km/h) indicator
lamp 4 will turn off and indicator lamp 5 will
flash until Entry/Exit Mode is achieved at
which point indicator lamp 5 will go solid.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
If during the height change to Entry/Exit
Mode, the vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
(24 km/h), the height change will be paused
until the vehicle speed either goes below
15 mph (24 km/h) and the height change
continues to Entry/Exit Mode, or exceeds
25 mph (40 km/h) and the vehicle height will
return to NRH. Entry/Exit Mode may be
selected while the vehicle is not moving
provided that the engine is still running and
all doors remain closed.
Transport Mode - No indicator lamps will be
illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Transport Mode.
Tire/Jack Mode - Indicator lamps 2 and 5 will
be illuminated. Customer driving will disable
Tire/Jack Mode.
Wheel Alignment Mode - Indicator lamps
4 and 5 will be illuminated. Customer driving
will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
SELEC-TERRAIN MODE SELECTION
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Selec-Terrain Switch
Selec-Terrain consists of the following
positions:
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When
in SNOW mode (depending on certain oper-
ating conditions), the transmission may use
SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear) during
launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
If equipped with air suspension, the default
ride height for SNOW is Normal Ride Height
(NRH).
AUTO – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel
to provide improved handling and accelera-
tion over two-wheel drive vehicles. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Normal Ride Height (NRH).
SAND – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as sand or wet grass.
Driveline is maximized for traction. Some
binding may be felt on less forgiving surfaces.
The electronic brake controls are set to limit
traction control management of throttle and
wheel spin. If equipped with air suspension,
the default ride height for Sand is Normal
Ride Height (NRH).
MUD – Off road calibration for use on low
traction surfaces such as mud. Driveline is
maximized for traction. Some binding may be
felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic
brake controls are set to limit traction control
management of throttle and wheel spin. If
equipped with air suspension, the level will
change to Off Road 1.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
ROCK – Off road calibration is only available
in 4WD LOW range. The vehicle is raised (if
equipped with Air Suspension) for improved
ground clearance. Traction based tuning with
improved steerability for use on high traction
off-road surfaces. Use for low speed obsta-
cles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If
equipped with air suspension, the vehicle
level will change to Off-Road 2. If the
Selec-Terrain switch is in ROCK mode, and
the transfer case is switched from 4WD LOW
to 4WD HIGH, the Selec-Terrain system will
return to AUTO.
NOTE:
Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec Speed
Control for steep downhill control. See “Elec-
tronic Brake Control System” in this section for
further information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a
message will appear in the instrument cluster.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
SELEC-TRACK — IF EQUIPPED (SRT)
Description
Selec-Track combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
Rotate the Selec-Track knob to select the
desired mode.
Selec-Track Switch
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for
further information.
Selec-Track consists of the following positions:
SPORT – Dry weather, on-road calibration.
Performance based tuning that provides a
rear wheel drive feel but with improved
handling and acceleration over a two-wheel
drive vehicle. This feature will reset to AUTO
on an ignition cycle.
SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
inclement weather. Use on and off road on
loose traction surfaces such as snow. This
feature will reset to AUTO upon an ignition
cycle.
AUTO – Fully automatic full time four-wheel
drive operation can be used on and off road.
Balances traction with seamless steering feel
to provide improved handling and accelera-
tion over two-wheel drive vehicles.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
TRACK – Track road calibration for use on
high traction surfaces. Driveline is maximized
for traction. Some binding may be felt on less
forgiving surfaces. This feature will reset to
AUTO on an ignition cycle.
TOW – Use this mode for towing and hauling
heavy loads. Vehicle suspension will go to
SPORT mode. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is
enabled in the ESC system. This feature will
reset to AUTO upon an ignition cycle.
CUSTOM
This mode allows the driver to create a custom
vehicle configuration that is saved for quick
selection of favorite settings. The system will
return to AUTO mode when the ignition switch is
cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is
selected. While in CUSTOM Mode the Stability,
Transmission, Steering, Suspension, all-wheel
drive set up, and Paddle shifter settings may be
configured through the custom mode set-up.
NOTE:
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for
further information.
ACTIVE DAMPING SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic
controlled damping system. This system
reduces body roll and pitch in many driving
situations including cornering, acceleration and
braking. There are 3 modes:
Street Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, SNOW and CUSTOM.) — Used during
highway speeds where a touring suspension
feel is desired.
Sport Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, SPORT, CUSTOM and TOW.) — Provides
a firm suspension for better handling.
Track Mode (Available in terrain positions
AUTO, TRACK and CUSTOM.) — Provides a full
firm suspension for an aggressive track expe-
rience.
Refer to the “Drive Mode Supplement” for
further information.
LAUNCH CONTROL
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control
system that is designed to allow the driver to
achieve maximum vehicle acceleration in a
straight line. Launch Control is a form of traction
control that manages tire slip while launching
the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where
consistent quarter mile and zero to sixty times
are desired. The system is not intended to
compensate for lack of driver experience or
familiarity with the race track. Use of this
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.)
conditions may results in excess wheel slip
outside this systems control resulting in an
aborted launch.
Preconditions:
Launch Control should not be used on public
roads. Always check track conditions and the
surrounding area.
Launch Control is not available within the
first 500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
Launch Control should only be used when the
engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Launch Control is intended to be used on dry,
paved road surfaces only.
Launch Control is only available when the
following procedure is followed:
NOTE:
Pushing the SRT button on the Selec-Track
switch or pressing the “Apps” button on the
touchscreen are the two options to access
launch control features. Please refer to the
“Drive Mode Supplement” for further informa-
tion.
1. Press the “Race Options” button on the
touchscreen or push the LAUNCH button
on the Selec-Track switch.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on
the touchscreen. This screen will allow you
to adjust your launch RPM for optimum
launch/traction.
3. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button
on the touchscreen, follow instructions in
the instrument cluster display.
Make sure the vehicle is not moving
Put vehicle in FIRST gear
Steering wheel must be pointing straight
Vehicle must be on level ground
Apply brake pressure
While holding the brake, rapidly apply
and hold the accelerator pedal to wide
open throttle. The engine speed will hold
at the RPM that was set in the “Launch
RPM Set-up” screen
NOTE:
Messages will appear in the instrument cluster
display to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
4. When the above conditions have been met,
the instrument cluster display will read
“Release Brake”.
5. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle
reaches 62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system will
return to its current ESC mode.
Launch control will abort before launch
completion, display “Launch Aborted” in the
cluster under any the following conditions:
The accelerator pedal is released during
launch.
The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no
longer moving in a straight line.
The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change
the system to another mode.
NOTE:
After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Use on slippery or loose surfaces may cause
damage to vehicle components and is not
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels
are spinning and do not have traction.
Damage to the transmission may occur.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ONLY
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
during light load and cruise conditions. The
system is automatic with no driver inputs or
additional driving skills required.
NOTE:
This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you
good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will
vary its assist to provide light efforts while
parking and good feel while driving. If the
electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still
have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be
selected through the Uconnect System. Refer to
”Customer Programmable Features” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
If the Electric Power Steering warning
icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE
SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
instrument cluster display, this indicates the
vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. Refer to “Warning Lights And
Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the
“POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP”
message is displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, they indicate that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. Once driving conditions are
safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few
moments until the icon and message turn off.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
AUTOMATIC MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer engine
start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” in this chapter for
further information.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen.
In the following situations, the engine will not
stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
ACC is on and speed is set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
2. The “Stop/Start OFF” message will appear
in instrument cluster display within the
Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to an ON condition every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Speed Control functions are operated
at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Speed Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
TO ACTIVATE
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Speed Control is on.
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
To turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. “CRUISE CONTROL OFF” will
appear in the instrument cluster display to
indicate the Speed Control is off. The system
should be turned off when not in use.
TO SET A DESIRED SPEED
Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed. Once a speed has been set, a
message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating what speed was
set. A cruise indicator lamp, along with set
speed will also appear and stay on in the
instrument cluster when the speed is set.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system OFF when you are not using it.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
TO ACCELERATE FOR PASSING
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
TO RESUME SPEED
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
TO DEACTIVATE
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Speed Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Control function performs differently. Please
refer to the proper section within this chapter.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
(Continued)
(Continued)
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes
function differently. Always confirm which mode
is selected.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
while following a target vehicle and hold
the vehicle for 2 seconds in the stop
position. If the target vehicle does not
start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
O
PERATION
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning system.
ACTIVATING ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
(ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the
ready state, the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low
When you apply the brakes
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Setting Decrease
5 —SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Setting Increase
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
ESC Full Off mode is active
TO ACTIVATE/DEACTIVATE
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
TO SET A DESIRED ACC S PEED
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to
accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO CANCEL
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs.
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds.
Driver door is opened at low speeds.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
TO TURN OFF
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed.
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button is pushed.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged.
TO RESUME
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, then the system will
cancel and the brake force will be
ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
TO VARY THE SPEED SETTING
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) buttons, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a
full stop when following a target vehicle. If an
ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a
standstill, the host vehicle will release the
vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated).
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
SETTING THE FOLLOWING DISTANCE IN
ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting Decrease button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the
instrument cluster displays the ACC Set With
Target Indicator light, and the system adjusts
vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages. (Refer to the
information on ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
OVERTAKE AID
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC OPERATION AT STOP
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a
standstill while following a target vehicle, if the
target vehicle starts moving within two seconds
of your vehicle coming to a standstill, your
vehicle will resume motion without the need for
any driver action.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill, the ACC with Stop system will cancel
and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
M
ENU
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will
read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to
the last display selected after five seconds of
no ACC display activity
DISPLAY WARNINGS AND
M
AINTENANCE
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional
information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at your
authorized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and a
chime will sound when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at your authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
PRECAUTIONS WHILE DRIVING WITH
ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for
the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE
C
ONTROL MODE
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed
without requiring the driver to operate the
accelerator. Cruise Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
system is turned on via the on/off control. It
turns green when the cruise control is set.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position.
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up (e.g. during
a parking maneuver). If your vehicle is equipped
with an automatic transmission, the vehicle
brakes may be automatically applied and
released when performing a reverse parking
maneuver if the system detects a possible
collision with an obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-
ride automatic braking by changing the gear
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if ESC is
not available.
Automatic brakes are not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the
ParkSense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
obstacle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the
Customer-Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect System.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled
at this gear selector position, the system will
remain active until the vehicle speed is
increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The ParkSense display is shown in the
instrument cluster display as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear
regions based on the obstacle’s distance and
location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone
will change from a single 1/2 second tone to
slow, to fast, to continuous.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
Rear ParkSense Arcs
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Rear chime volume settings can be selected
from the Customer-Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high. The factory default volume
setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer - Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect System.
Refer to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist system has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will
display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS" or
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition.
If the message continues to appear, see an
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear fascia/bumper is free of
snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
(Continued)
(Continued)
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster display will display
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as
the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position and the vehicle is
in REVERSE. An open liftgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver). If your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transmission, the vehicle brakes may be
automatically applied and released when
performing a reverse parking maneuver if the
system detects a possible collision with an
obstacle.
NOTE:
The driver can disable the automatic braking
function by turning ParkSense off via the
ParkSense switch. The driver can also over-
ride automatic braking by changing the gear
or by pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its
capacity during the braking event.
Automatic brakes are not available if ESC is
not available.
Automatic brakes are not available if the
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
Automatic brakes will not be available if there
is a faulted condition detected with the Park-
Sense Park Assist system or the Braking
System Module.
The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not
enough to avoid colliding with a detected
obstacle.
The automatic braking function may not be
applied fast enough for obstacles that move
toward the rear of the vehicle from the left
and/or right sides.
The automatic braking function can be
enabled/disabled from the Customer
Programmable Features section of the Ucon-
nect System.
ParkSense will retain its last known configu-
ration state for the automatic braking func-
tion through ignition cycles.
The automatic braking function is intended to
assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions
with detected obstacles when backing up in
REVERSE gear.
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
The driver must stay in full control of the
vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
responsible for the vehicle's movements.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is
enabled at one of these gear selector positions,
the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become
active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to
speeds less than approximately 6 mph
(9 km/h). A display warning will appear in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle is in
REVERSE and the speed exceeds 7 mph
(11 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors (or six, if equipped
with Active Park Assist), located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the
system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE
or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle
has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in the left and/or right front
or rear regions based on the object’s distance
and location relative to the vehicle.
If an object is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single arc in
the left and/or right rear region and the system
will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer
to the object, the display will show the single arc
moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will
change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow,
to fast, to continuous.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following charts
show the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is
applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be
selected from the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The chime volume settings include low,
medium, and high. The factory default volume
setting is medium.
ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected from
the Customer Programmable Features section
of the Uconnect System. Refer to "Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed
to disable the system, the instrument
cluster will display the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for approximately five
seconds. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the
instrument cluster display will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
When ParkSense is disabled and the gear
selector is moved to the DRIVE position, no
warning message will be displayed.
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No No No Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and the system requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message
for five seconds. When the gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will display a "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS",
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" pop up message for five
seconds.
After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be
displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
front or rear sensor location depending on
where the fault is detected. The system will
continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is
functioning properly. These arc alerts will
interrupt the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if
an object is detected within the five second
pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain
displayed for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow,
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to
appear see an authorized dealer.
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument
cluster display, see your authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris
to keep the ParkSense system operating
properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other
vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
When you move the gear selector to the
REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned
off, the instrument cluster will display “PARK-
SENSE OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster.
ParkSense should be disabled when the lift-
gate is in the open position. An opened lift-
gate could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
— IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
intended to assist the driver during parallel and
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying
a proper parking space, providing audible/
visual instructions, and controlling the steering
wheel. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver
maintains control of the accelerator, gear
selector and brakes. Depending on the driver's
parking maneuver selection, the ParkSense
Active Park Assist system is capable of
maneuvering a vehicle into a parallel or a
perpendicular parking space on either side (i.e.,
driver side or passenger side).
NOTE:
The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
surrounding objects, and must intervene as
required.
The system is provided to assist the driver
and not to substitute the driver.
During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the
driver touches the steering wheel after being
instructed to remove their hands from the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
the driver will be required to manually
complete the parking maneuver.
The system may not work in all conditions
(e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy
rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking
space that has surfaces that will absorb the
ultrasonic sensor waves).
New vehicles from the dealership must have
at least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated
before the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system is fully calibrated and performs accu-
rately. This is due to the system’s dynamic
vehicle calibration to improve the perfor-
mance of the feature. The system will also
continuously perform the dynamic vehicle
calibration to account for differences such as
over or under inflated tires and new tires.
ENABLING AND DISABLING THE
P
ARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST
S
YSTEM
The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system can be enabled and disabled
with the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch, located on the switch panel
below the Uconnect display.
To enable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch once (LED turns on).
To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch again (LED turns off).
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
turn off automatically for any of the following
conditions:
The parking maneuver is completed
Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking
space
Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space
Touching the steering wheel during active
steering guidance into the parking space
Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park
Assist switch
Driver's door is opened
Rear liftgate is opened
Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
System intervention.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present:
Gear position is in DRIVE
Ignition is in the ON/RUN position
ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated
Driver's door is closed
Rear liftgate is closed
Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h)
NOTE:
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster
display will instruct the driver to slow down.
If the vehicle is driven above approximately
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel.
The driver must then reactivate the system by
pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist
switch.
The outer surface and the underside of the
front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction.
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
conditions are not present.
PARALLEL PARKING SPACE ASSISTANCE
O
PERATION /DISPLAY
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display.
You may switch to perpendicular parking if you
desire. Push the OK button on the left side
steering wheel switch to change your parking
space setting.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
Active ParkSense Searching
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a parallel parking sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you
will be instructed to place the gear selector into
the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
When the driver places the gear selector into
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position.
When the maneuver is complete, the driver will
be instructed to check the vehicle's parking
position. If the driver is satisfied with the vehicle
position, they should shift to PARK. The "Active
ParkSense Complete - Check Parking Position"
message will be momentarily displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
PERPENDICULAR PARKING SPACE
A
SSISTANCE OPERATION /DISPLAY
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Press OK to Switch to Perpendicular” message
will show in the instrument cluster display. Push
the OK button on the left side steering wheel
switch to change your parking space setting to
a perpendicular maneuver. You may switch
back to parallel parking if you desire.
Once the driver pushes OK for a perpendicular
parking maneuver, the “Active ParkSense
Searching - Press OK to Switch to Parallel”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Active ParkSense Searching
NOTE:
When searching for a parking space, use the
turn signal indicator to select which side of
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
if the turn signal is not activated.
The driver needs to make sure that the
selected parking space for the maneuver
remains free and clear of any obstructions
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
The driver is responsible to ensure that the
selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
When seeking for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
The feature will only indicate the last
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the
system will only indicate the last detected
parking space for the maneuver).
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you
will be instructed to place the gear selector into
the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver.
When the system instructs the driver to
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
allow a maximum of six shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed within six shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
manually.
The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
tells them to slow down. The driver is then
responsible for completing the maneuver if
the system is canceled.
If the system is canceled during the
maneuver for any reason, the driver must
take control of the vehicle.
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
the vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the DRIVE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver places the gear selector into
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the
driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move forward.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward
When the vehicle has reached the end of its
forward movement, the system will instruct the
driver to check their surroundings and stop the
vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — STOP
NOTE:
It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
When the driver places the gear selector into
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
(Continued)
(Continued)
The system will then instruct the driver to check
their surroundings and move backward.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park
position. When the maneuver is complete, the
driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's
parking position. If the driver is satisfied with
the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check
Parking Position" message will be momentarily
displayed.
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when performing
parallel or perpendicular parking maneu-
vers even when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system. Always check carefully
behind and in front of your vehicle, look
behind and in front of you, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehi-
cles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up and moving forward. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly
is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do
so can result in injury or damage to vehicles
or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and shape,
giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will
not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
If the driver continues to unintentionally drift
out of the lane, the LaneSense system provides
a visual warning through the instrument cluster
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across the
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides visual warnings
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible warning to the driver when the driver’s
hands are not detected on the steering wheel.
The system will cancel if the driver does not
return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The default status of LaneSense is off. The LED
in LaneSense button will be illuminated while
the system is deactivated.
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
LaneSense On Message
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
system in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active
Park Assist system.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state (on or off) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid
yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line,
Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is on to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display and a torque warning in the steering
wheel if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-
tale changes from solid green to solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Sensed With Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow
Thin Line/Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Thick Line,
Solid Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning and the
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you
can configure through the Uconnect system
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” for further information.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-
ings.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
display screen along with a caution note to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the navigation or audio
screen appears again.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears
again. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK, the
vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the user presses image defeat “X” to exit out
of the camera video display.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering
wheel position. A dashed center line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different colored
zones indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Rear Camera — Viewing At Speed
When the vehicle is in PARK,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE the Rear View
Camera can be activated with the
“Rear View Camera” button in the
Controls menu. This feature allows the
customer to monitor the area directly behind
the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to 10
seconds while at speed. If the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View
Camera image will be displayed continuously
until deactivated via the “X” button on the
touchscreen.
Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch
(located under the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE:
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly
push on the fuel door to break the ice buildup
and re-release the fuel door using the inside
release button. Do not pry on the door.
Fuel Filler
3. There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe,
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper
doors while refueling.
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel, when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
6. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
7. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper doors to
allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
EMERGENCY FUEL FILLER DOOR
R
ELEASE
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use
the fuel filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push the inboard edge of the left storage
bin to the center, this will pop up the
outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other
hand to disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
5. Pull the release cable to open the fuel door,
push the release cable back to the home
position to re-seat the fuel door latch to the
closed position.
Release Cable
NOTE:
If the fuel door does not latch after the manual
release cable has been activated, the actuator
latch should be manually returned to the closed
position.
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options
and cargo. The label also specifies maximum
capacities of front and rear axle systems Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum permissible load on the front and
rear axles. The load must be distributed in the
cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not
exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) has not been
exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of
the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Weighing the vehicle may show that the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of either the front or
rear axles has been exceeded but the total load
is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must
be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as
appropriate until the specified weight
limitations are met. Store the heavier items
down low and be sure that the weight is
distributed equally. Stow all loose items
securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the
total allowable weight of your vehicle. This
includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that
you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle
Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of
the trailer plus the weight of all cargo,
consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
"loaded and ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use
a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control
of your vehicle and cause a collision.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the
maximum capacity of the front and rear axles.
Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either
front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/
Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The Tongue Weight (TW) is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) can be a
mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable
friction associated with the telescoping motion
to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the
manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing
towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs
(907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs
(1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs
(2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs
(4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS ) — NON SRT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain:
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information. The addition of passengers and
cargo may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding
Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,700 lbs (1,678 kg).
Engine Model Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue
Wt. (See Note)
3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x2 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
3.6L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 6,200 lbs (2,812 kg) 620 lbs (281 kg)
5.7L (Std Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) 500 lbs (226 kg)
5.7L (HD Cooling) 4x4 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (326 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS ) — SRT
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo, and should never exceed the
weight referenced on the Tire and Loading
Information placard. Refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for further
information.
The manufacturer does not recommend
using the run flat feature while driving a
vehicle loaded at full capacity or towing a
trailer.
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL (SUMMIT MODELS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover, this must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This hitch receiver cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
quarter turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of
the locking retainer if needed for added
leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt.
Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
6.2L Supercharged Automatic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)
6.4L Automatic 12,600 lbs (5,715 kg) 55 sq ft (5.11 sq m) 7,200 lbs (3,265 kg) 720 lbs (327 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward
(towards you), pull downwards to disengage
the tabs located at the top of the hitch
receiver cover.
Hitch Receiver Cover
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing
repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER
R
EMOVAL (SRT MODELS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver cover. This must be removed to
access the trailer hitch receiver (if equipped).
This hitch receiver cover is located at the
bottom center of the rear fascia.
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at
the bottom of the hitch receiver cover a
quarter turn counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Use a suitable tool such as a coin in the slot of
the locking retainer if needed for added
leverage.
Hitch Receiver Cover
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward
(towards you).
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainer
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Lower back down to disengage the tabs
located at the top of the hitch receiver cover
and then pull outwards to remove.
Hitch Receiver Cover Removal
To reinstall the hitch receiver cover after towing
repeat the procedure in reverse order.
NOTE:
Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver
cover in the bumper fascia prior to installation.
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” in this
chapter for the maximum combined weight of
occupants and cargo placard for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely
side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers
heavier in front is the cause of many trailer
collisions.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
(Continued)
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the
“Scheduled Servicing”. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper maintenance intervals. When towing
a trailer, never exceed the GAWR or GCWR
ratings.
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for proper tire inflation proce-
dures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
the proper inspection procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires” in
“Servicing And Maintenance” for the proper
tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping, and backing up the trailer in an area
located away from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE,
select TOW mode, or use the AutoStick shift
control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear (using the AutoStick shift
control) while operating the vehicle under heavy
loading conditions, will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will
also provide better engine braking.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Using TOW mode, or selecting a lower gear
(using the AutoStick shift control) while oper-
ating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, will improve performance and extend
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup. This action will also provide
better engine braking.
TOW Mode
To reduce the potential for automatic
transmission overheating, select TOW mode
when driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear
(using the AutoStick shift paddles) on more
severe grades.
AutoStick
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Temporarily turn off air conditioning.
SNOW PLOW
Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket
equipment should not be added to the front end
of your vehicle. The airbag crash sensors may
be affected by the change in the front end
structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a
collision.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any
other aftermarket equipment to the front of
your vehicle. This could adversely affect the
functioning of the airbag system and you
could be injured.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
Recreational towing is not allowed on SRT vehicles.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4-LO Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4-LO Range
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
These vehicles may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be
placed in Transport Mode before tying them
down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed
truck. Refer to “Quadra-Lift” in “Starting and
Operating” for more information. If the
vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode
(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs
should be fastened over the tires using
specific straps (not to the body). Failure to
follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper
tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the
drivetrain will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive
models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are
OFF the ground. This may be accomplished
using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow
dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal
Ride Height.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK.
4. Turn the ignition OFF.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly,
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed
for towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA-TRAC I (SINGLE-SPEED
T
RANSFER CASE) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
M
ODELS
Recreational towing is not allowed. These
models do not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in
the transfer case.
NOTE:
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF
the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
Q
UADRA–TRAC II/QUADRA–DRIVE II
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N) and the transmission must be in PARK (P)
for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL selection
button is adjacent to the transfer case selector
switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case
NEUTRAL can take place with the selector
switch in any mode position.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground, with the engine running.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
The transmission must be in PARK for
recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the transfer
case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise,
internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to
Normal Ride Height.
5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for four seconds. The light behind
the N symbol will blink, indicating shift in
progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
IN NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
instrument cluster.
NEUTRAL (N) Button
6. After the shift is completed and the
NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the
NEUTRAL (N) button.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the
transmission back into NEUTRAL.
10. Firmly apply the parking brake.
11. With the transmission and transfer case in
NEUTRAL, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine turns
off.
12. Place the transmission gear selector in
PARK. Release the brake pedal.
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn
the ignition to the OFF mode.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indi-
cator light will flash continuously until all
requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL
(N) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air
suspension, the engine should be started
and left running for a minimum of 60
seconds (with all the doors closed) at least
once every 24 hours. This process allows the
air suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride
height to compensate for temperature
effects.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
and hold the recessed transfer case
NEUTRAL (N) button (located by the selector
switch) for one second.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
7. When the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns
off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After
the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released,
the transfer case will shift to the position
indicated by the selector switch.
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
engine off.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release
the brake pedal, and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
NOTE:
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N)
button, and must continue to be met until the
shift has been completed. If any of these
requirements are not met before pushing the
NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator
light will flash continuously until all require-
ments are met or until the NEUTRAL (N)
button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for
a shift to take place and for the position indi-
cator lights to be operable. If the ignition is
not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not
take place and no position indicator lights will
be on or flashing.
A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator
light indicates that shift requirements have
not been met.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
NOTE:
Prior to off-road driving with non-Summit
models that are also equipped with an Off Road
Package, remove the lower fascia to prevent
damage.
The lower fascia is attached to the lower part of
the front fascia with seven quarter turn
fasteners and can be removed by hand. The
front license plate bracket must be removed
first if equipped.
Front Air Dam
NOTE:
On Summit models the lower front fascia is not
removable.
Lower Front Fascia Removal:
1. Remove the seven quarter turn fasteners.
2. Starting on one side of the vehicle,
disengage lower fascia from the upper
fascia. Grasp the portion inside the wheel
well. Pulling it downwards and toward you,
separate the tabs from the slots in the
upper fascia.
3. Continue working your way across the
vehicle, separating the remaining tabs from
the slots in the upper fascia.
NOTE:
Do not allow the lower fascia to freely hang from
the tabs in the opposite corner as damage to
lower and upper fascia may result.
4. Store the lower fascia in a safe location.
NOTE:
It is recommend to also remove the radar
sensor on vehicle equipped to Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC). This radar sensor is specifically
calibrated to your vehicle and is not inter-
changeable with other radar sensors.
1 — Front Bumper
2 — Front Air Dam Fasteners
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
Radar Sensor Removal Procedure (If Equipped
With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. With the lower fascia removed, which
provides access to the sensor and bracket,
disconnect the wiring harness from the
sensor.
2. Using a suitable tool, disconnect the wire
clip from the bracket.
NOTE:
Before the next step, it is recommended to
scribe location to assist in reinstallation.
3. Using a suitable tool, remove the two
fasteners that hold the sensor bracket to
the bumper beam.
4. Locate the protective connector on the rear
of the bumper beam.
Bumper Beam
NOTE:
Only models with the Off Road Package are
equipped with the a protective connector.
5. Remove the plug from the protective
connector and install on the sensor.
6. Insert the wiring harness connector into the
protective connector.
7. Store sensor and bracket in a safe place.
NOTE:
All Speed Control functions will be disabled
when the radar sensor is disconnected.
Radar Sensor Installation Procedure (If
Equipped With Adaptive Cruise Control [ACC]):
1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector
from the protective connector on the
bumper beam.
2. Remove plug from radar sensor and install
in protective connector.
3. Using the previously scribed marks, reinstall
the radar sensor and bracket using the two
fasteners.
NOTE:
Some alignment may be required upon fascia
installation to align sensor with fascia.
4. Install the wiring harness connector into the
radar sensor.
NOTE:
If you receive a fault, see an authorized dealer
they may need to perform a sensor alignment.
1 — Inside Bumper Beam
2 — Protective Connector Location
3 — Sensor Bracket Fasteners
4 — Sensor Bracket
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lower Front Fascia Installation
NOTE:
This will only work if you have a helper.
1. Starting at the center of the vehicle,
engage a sufficient number of tabs to
support the weight of the lower fascia
(typically one or two tabs) into the upper
fascia.
2. Working your way outward, engage the tabs
into the slots on one side of the vehicle.
3. Return to the center of the vehicle and
repeat Step 2 to the opposite side of the
vehicle.
NOTE:
It may be necessary to apply additional force
to individual tabs to make sure they are fully
engaged.
Do not use any tools to apply additional force
to the tabs as damage to the upper and lower
fascias may result.
4. Reinstall the seven quarter turn fasteners.
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped
When off-roading, it is recommended that the
lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the
current obstacle or terrain be selected. The
vehicle height should then be raised as required
by the changes in terrain.
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically
change the vehicle to the optimized height
based on the Selec-Terrain switch position. The
vehicle height can be changed from the default
height for each Selec-Terrain mode by normal
use of the air suspension switches. Refer to
“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
When To Use 4WD LOW Range — If
Equipped
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction. This range should be limited
to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4WD LOW range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water.
NOTE:
Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
20 inches (51 cm) of water, while crossing
small rivers or streams. To maintain optimal
performance of your vehicle's heating and venti-
lation system it is recommended to switch the
system into recirculation mode during water
fording.
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD LOW Range on dry
pavement; driveline damage may result.
4WD-LOW Range locks front and rear
drivelines together and does not allow for
differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD LOW on
pavement will cause driveline binding; use
only on wet or slippery surfaces.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off), avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing water avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed, causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
20 inches (51 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 20 inches (51 cm) of water
is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil,
transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure
the fluids have not been contaminated.
Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in
appearance) should be flushed/changed as
soon as possible to prevent component
damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information. Do not shift
to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
forward motion. Over-revving the engine can
spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the
transfer case to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and
4WD LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Restart the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R).
Back slowly down the hill, allowing the
compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required
to control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and
avoid locking or skidding the tires.
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill.
Always drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain forward motion by turning the front
wheels slowly. This may provide a fresh “bite”
into the surface and will usually provide traction
to complete the climb.
Traction Downhill
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill
Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid
repeated heavy braking.
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or
Selec-Speed Control use the following
procedure:
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the
vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four
wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension.
Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion,
or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back carefully straight down a hill in
REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the brake.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
281
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may discharge the battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the oper-
ator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
BULB REPLACEMENT
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Glove Compartment Lamp 194
Grab Handle Lamp L002825W5W
Overhead Console Reading Lamps VT4976
Rear Cargo Lamp 214–2
Visor Vanity Lamp V26377
Underpanel Courtesy Lamps 906
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination) 103
Telltale/Hazard Lamp 74
Non SRT Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (Low Beam) — If Equipped H11
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Headlamps (High Beam) — If Equipped H9
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
Front Fog Lamps
H11
LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker — If Equipped W5W
Premium Front Side Marker — If Equipped LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Front Park/Turn Lamp — If Equipped 7444NA (WY28/8W)
Rear Body Side Backup Lamp 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W)
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer
or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
Non SRT Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SRT Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Premium Headlamps (Low/High Beam) D3S (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Premium Park/Turn Signal Lamp LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Premium Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Premium Front Fog Lamps LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Premium Front Side Marker LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Backup Lamps 7440 (W21W)
Auxiliary Liftgate Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Liftgate Backup Lamps 921 (W16W)
Rear License Lamps LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Rear Body Side Stop/Turn Lamps 3157KRD LCP (P27/7W)
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED - (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer
or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
(Continued)
BULB REPLACEMENT
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
— If Equipped
The headlamps are a type of high voltage
discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the headlamp switch off and
the key removed. Because of this, you should
not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) headlamps, when the head-
lamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to the
lamps.
This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system
charges.
Halogen Headlamps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back to vapor. Turning
the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing
process.
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
NOTE:
The air filter housing must be removed.
The windshield washer reservoir may need to
be rotated out of the way by removing the
fastener.
Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be
repositioned by removing the fasteners, and
moving the unit out of the way.
3. To access the low beam bulb you must
remove the rubber boot seal from backside
of the lamp housing.
Rubber Boot Seal
NOTE:
Ensure the rubber boot is properly reinstalled to
prevent water and moisture from entering the
lamp.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps when the headlamp switch is
turned ON. It may cause serious electrical
shock or electrocution if not serviced
properly. See an authorized dealer for
service.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by
touching it with your fingers or by allowing it
to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened
bulb life will result.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Turn the low or high beam bulb a quarter
turn counterclockwise to remove from
housing.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
Front Turn Signal Lamp
The front turn signal lamps are LEDs. See an
authorized dealer for service.
1. Open the hood.
2. Access the back of the headlamp.
NOTE:
The air filter housing must be removed.
The windshield washer reservoir may need to
be rotated out of the way by removing the
fastener.
Coolant reservoir (if equipped) will need to be
repositioned by removing the fasteners, and
moving the unit out of the way.
3. Turn the turn signal bulb a quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector and
replace the bulb.
Front Fog Lamps
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Rear Tail, Stop, and Turn Signal Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail
lamp housing.
Tail Lamp Push Pins
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward
to disengage the lamp from the aperture
panel.
Always use the correct bulb size and type
for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or
type may overheat and cause damage to
the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp
wiring.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
4. Twist socket counterclockwise and remove
from lamp.
Rear Of Tail Lamp
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and
reattach the lamp assembly.
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a suitable tool to pry the lower trim from
the liftgate.
Liftgate Lower Trim
3. Continue removing the trim.
4. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
5. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s)
counterclockwise.
Rear Of Liftgate Tail Lamp
6. Remove/replace bulb(s).
7. Reinstall the socket(s).
8. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate
trim.
1 — Rear Turn/Stop Bulb Socket
2 — LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
3 — Backup Bulb Socket
1 — Auxiliary LED Tail Connector – Do Not Remove
2 — Backup Bulb Socket
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The center high mounted stop lamp (CHMSL) is
an LED. Service at an authorized dealer.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
Rear License Lamp
The rear license lamps are LEDs. See an
authorized dealer for service.
FUSES
GENERAL INFORMATION
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse
element
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
element (blown fuse)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
UNDERHOOD FUSES
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side,
next to the battery terminal posts. This center
contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays,
and circuit breakers.
A description of each fuse and component may
be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the
inside cover that corresponds to the following
chart.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Radiator Fan — If Equipped
F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension — If Equipped
F06 40 Amp Green – Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump
F07 30 Amp Pink – Starter Solenoid
F09 30 Amp Pink –
Diesel Fuel Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Brake Vacuum
Pump
F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller/Exterior Lighting #2
F11 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake — If Equipped
F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3/Power Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor Front
F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4/Exterior Lighting #1
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F15 40 Amp Green –
Low Temperature Radiator (LTR) Engine Cooling Pump — If
Equipped
F17 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer — If Equipped
F19 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Solenoid — If Equipped
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module
F22 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module
F23 30 Amp Pink – Interior Lights #1
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module
F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F26 30 Amp Pink – Anti-lock Brakes/Stability Control Module, ECU and Valves
F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights — If Equipped
F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights — If Equipped
F30 30 Amp Pink –
Trailer Tow (Receptacle) / Trailer Tow (Separate E-Brake) /
Trailer Tow (BUX) — If Equipped
F32 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module
F34 30 Amp Pink – Slip Differential Control — If Equipped
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof - If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
F37 25 Amp Clear – Rear Blower Motor — If Equipped
F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC — If Equipped
F39 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate — If Equipped
F40 – 10 Amp Red Daytime Running Lights/Headlamp Leveling
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – 5 Amp Tan Cyber Security Gateway
F49 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Central Stack/Climate Control
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow
Air Suspension Control Module/Slip Differential - If
Equipped
F51 – 15 Amp Blue KIN/RF HUB/Steering Column Lock — If Equipped
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Content (Diesel Engine Only)
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow NOX Sensor — If Equipped
F58 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamps LH — If Equipped
F59 – 10 Amp Red Purging Pump (Diesel Engine Only)
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module
F61 – 10 Amp Red
Transmission Control Module/PM Sensor (Diesel Engine
Only)
F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow
Ignition Coils / Ignition Coil Capacitors / Short Runner
Valve Actuator — If Equipped (Gas) Urea Heater (Diesel)
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors/Powertrain
F66 – 10 Amp Red
Sunroof/Rain Sensor/Inside Rear View Mirror / USB Port /
DSCR / DTV — If Equipped
F67 – 15 Amp Blue CD/DVD/UCI Port/USB Charging Port
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Wiper Motor
F69 – 15 Amp Blue Spotlight Feed — If Equipped
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump Motor
F71 – 30 Amp Green Amplifier/ANCM — If Equipped
F72 – 10 Amp Red ECM
F73 – 15 Amp Blue HID Headlamp RT — If Equipped
F75 – 10 Amp Red Dual Batt Control — If Equipped
F76 – 10 Amp Red Anti-lock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control
F77 – 10 Amp Red
Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module
— If Equipped
F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module/Electric Power Steering
F80 – 10 Amp Red
Universal Garage Door Opener/Anti-Intrusion Module — If
Equipped/Siren — If Equipped
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn/Stop Lights — If Equipped
F82 – 10 Amp Red
Steering Column Control Module/Cruise Control/DTV — If
Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
F83 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door
F84 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension — If Equipped
F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster/SGW/ITBM — If Equipped
F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Rear Seats/Cargo Area) Selectable
F92 – 10 Amp Red Rear Console Lamp — If Equipped
F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter/Transfer Case Module
F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Blind Spot Sensor — If Equipped
F96 – 10 Amp Red
Rear Seat Heater Switch/Flashlamp Charger — If
Equipped
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow
Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel — If
Equipped
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Ventilated Seats/Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
F99 – 10 Amp Red
Climate Control/Driver Assistance Systems Module/HALF/
Park Assist
F100 – 10 Amp Red Active Damping — If Equipped
F101 – 15 Amp Blue In Car Temperature Sensor/Humidity Sensor
F102 – 15 Amp Blue Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
F103 – 10 Amp Red
Cabin Heater (Diesel Engine Only)/Rear HVAC — If
Equipped
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow
Power Outlets (Instrument Panel/Center Console/Rear
Cargo — If Equipped)
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
RUN FLAT TIRES
SRT models are equipped with “run flat” tires.
Run flat tires allow the vehicle to be driven
approximately 50 miles (80 km) at 55 mph
(88 km/h). Tire service should be obtained to
avoid prolonged run flat feature usage.
JACK LOCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, below the load
floor.
Spare Tire/Jack And Tools
NOTE:
The funnel for the Cap-Less Fuel System is
located on top of the spare tire. If your vehicle is
out of fuel and an auxiliary fuel can is needed,
insert the funnel into the filler neck and proceed
to fill the vehicle. For vehicles not equipped with
a spare tire, the fuel filler funnel is stored in the
left storage bin under the load floor. For more
information on the Cap-Less Fuel System, refer
to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
The spare tire is stowed under the load floor in
the rear cargo area and is secured to the body
with a special wing nut.
Secured Spare Tire
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
WARNING!
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) if the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” is
illuminated. Vehicle handling and braking
may be reduced. You could have a collision
and be severely or fatally injured.
1 — Cap-Less Fuel Fill Funnel
2 — Jack
3 — Tire Changing Tools
4 — Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Always lift or jack the vehicle from the correct
jacking points. Failure to follow this
information could cause damage to the
vehicle or underbody components.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
Avoid ice or slippery surfaces.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite of the jacking position.
For example, if changing the driver’s front
tire, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift, refer to
“Quadra-Lift — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information on disabling
automatic leveling.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and tools from
storage. Turn the wing nut counter-
clockwise to remove the spare tire.
Removing Spare Tire
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts, using the lug wrench by turning them
counterclockwise, one turn, while the wheel
is still on the ground.
Loosen Lug Nuts
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack And Tool Assembly
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Locations
4. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated
by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is fully engaged.
NOTE:
Depending on vehicle trim level, certain models
come equipped with Rock Rails which have a
different front lifting point location. Also, the
triangular symbols are not visible for this trim
package.
Front Lifting Point
Front Lifting Point - Rock Rail
NOTE:
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards. See the following Front Jacking
Location images for reference. The position of
the front jack is the same for all trim levels.
Front Jacking Location
Front Jacking Location - Rock Rail
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
5. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on
the rear tie-down bracket, just forward of
the rear tire (as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding). Do not
raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack
is fully engaged.
NOTE:
The rear lifting point location is the same for all
trim levels.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Lifting Point - Rock Rail
Rear Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location - Rock Rail
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the
proper engagement location on the inside of
the panel. Damage of the vehicle may occur if
the procedure is not properly followed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
8. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the
cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the nuts.
Mounting Spare Tire
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
wheel blocks.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For correct lug nut torque,
refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by an authorized dealer or at
a service station.
Tighten Lug Nuts
11. Lower the jack to the fully closed position
and return it and the tools to the proper
positions in the foam tray.
12. Remove the small center cap and securely
store the road wheel in the cargo area. Turn
the wing nut clockwise until secured.
Storing Road Wheel
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 305
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible, properly
secure the spare tire with the special wing
nut torqued to 3.7 ft-lbs (5 N·m), reinstall
the jack and tool kit foam tray, and latch the
rear load floor cover.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for
more than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
ROAD TIRE INSTALLATION
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifi-
cations” in “Technical Specifications” for
proper lug nut torque for further
information.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack.
Jump starting can be dangerous if done
improperly, so please follow the procedures in
this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired
or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located under the
passenger's front seat. There are remote
terminals located under the hood to assist in
jump starting.
Under Hood Jump Starting Location
Jump Starting Locations
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do
not touch each other, or either vehicle, until
properly connected for jump starting.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) battery post. Pull
upward on the cover to remove it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective
Cap)
Remote Negative (-) Post
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 307
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground. A
“ground” is an exposed metallic/unpainted
part of the engine, frame or chassis, such as
an accessory bracket or large bolt. The
ground must be away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-) end of the
jumper cable from the remote negative (-)
post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle have the battery and charging system
tested at an authorized dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The fuel filling procedure for in case of an
emergency is described in the “Emergency Gas
Can Refueling” procedure. Refer to “Refueling
The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
the engine idle speed while preventing
vehicle motion with the brakes.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 309
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to move the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such
as a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release
is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Open the center console and locate the
Manual Park Release cover, remove it by
snapping the cover away from the console
hinges.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, push the
metal latch in towards the tether strap.
Release Latch
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. While the metal latch is in the open position,
pull upward on the tether strap until the
lever clicks and latches in the released
position. The transmission is now out of
PARK (P) and the vehicle can be moved.
Released Position
NOTE:
To prevent the vehicle from rolling unintention-
ally, firmly apply the parking brake.
To Disengage The Manual Park Release Lever:
1. To disengage the Manual Park Release,
apply tension upward while pushing the
release latch towards the tether to unlock
the lever.
Release Latch
2. Once the tension has been released and the
lever has been unlocked, be sure it is
stowed properly and locks into position.
Stowed Position
NOTE:
Be sure to replace the cover by snapping it back
in place.
CAUTION!
Closing the armrest while the Manual Park
Release is activated may damage the Manual
Park Release mechanism, the transmission,
and/or the armrest.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC OFF” switch, to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial
Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety”
for further information. Once the vehicle has
been freed, push the “ESC OFF” switch again to
restore “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of transmission failure
during prolonged efforts to free a stuck
vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h),
or drivetrain damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section for further information.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to
“Quadra-Lift” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run),
tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific tire tie-down nets. Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/
or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW
Range
Four-Wheel Drive Models
With 4WD LOW Range
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
Transmission in NEUTRAL
(N)
30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK (P)
Transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N)
Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 313
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC
mode.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park
Release” in this section for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
NOTE:
SRT vehicles and 4WD models without 4WD
LOW range should only be towed with all four
wheels OFF the ground.
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (with rear wheels on the ground) under
the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N).
Refer to "Manual Park Release" in this
chapter for instructions on shifting the trans-
mission to NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is
off.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph
(48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed
30 miles (48 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the
vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow
with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the
rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a
suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the
front wheels in the straight position) with the
rear wheels raised and the front wheels ON the
ground.
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
wheels on the ground can cause severe
transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a
towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the
ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N)
and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to
“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and
therefore must be towed with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be
located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 315
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE — SRT
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle's
battery is discharged, refer to “Manual Park
Release” in this chapter for instructions on
shifting the transmission out of PARK for
loading onto a flatbed truck.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle using any other method
can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
SCHEDULED SERVICING — NON-SRT
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Oil Change Required”
message is displayed. Severe operating
conditions can cause the change oil message to
illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km);
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off-road environment,
or is operated predominantly at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level
Check windshield washer fluid level
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder and fill as needed
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Plans on the following pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter.
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace the engine air cleaner filter, if necessary.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter. X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
X X
Replace accessory drive belt. X
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner
and pulley, replace if necessary.
X
Change transfer case fluid. X
Replace PCV valve X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
SCHEDULED SERVICING — SRT
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in
this manual must be done at the times or
mileages specified to protect the vehicle
warranty and ensure the best vehicle
performance and reliability. More frequent
maintenance may be needed for vehicles in
severe operating conditions, such as dusty
areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
The instrument cluster display will display an
“Oil Change Required” message and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil change
is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
The oil change indicator message will not
monitor the time since the last oil change.
Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six
months since your last oil change, even if the
oil change indicator message is NOT illumi-
nated.
Change your engine oil more often if you drive
your vehicle off-road for an extended period
of time.
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or
6 months, whichever comes first.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine
Compartment” in this section for further
information.
Check the windshield washer solvent and
add if required.
Once A Month
Check tire pressure and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
engine oil, brake master cylinder, and add as
needed.
Check all lights and other electrical items for
correct operation.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance
items may result in damage to the vehicle.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6
1
2
1
8
2
4
3
0
3
6
4
2
4
8
5
4
6
0
6
6
7
2
7
8
8
4
9
0
9
6
1
0
2
1
0
8
1
1
4
1
2
0
1
2
6
1
3
2
1
3
8
1
4
4
1
5
0
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
Change the engine oil and engine
oil filter.
X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rot
ate the tires, rotate at the first
sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before scheduled
maintenance.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
If using your vehicle for any of the
following: dusty or off-road
conditions. Inspect the engine air
cleaner filter; replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings; replace
if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the exhaust system. X X X X X X X X X X X X
Adjust the parking brake on
vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
X X X X X
Drain the transfer case and refill. X X X X X
Inspect the accessory drive belts
replace if necessary.
X X
Inspect the front and rear axle
fluid. Change if using your vehicle
for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, sustained high speed
driving, off-road or frequent
trailer towing.
X X X X X X
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6
1
2
1
8
2
4
3
0
3
6
4
2
4
8
5
4
6
0
6
6
7
2
7
8
8
4
9
0
9
6
1
0
2
1
0
8
1
1
4
1
2
0
1
2
6
1
3
2
1
3
8
1
4
4
1
5
0
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, and boot seals, for cracks
or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper
looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the engine air cleaner
filter.
X X X X X
Replace the air conditioning
filter.
X X X X X X
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary
X
Replace the spark plugs – 6.2L
Supercharged Engine.
1
X X
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6
1
2
1
8
2
4
3
0
3
6
4
2
4
8
5
4
6
0
6
6
7
2
7
8
8
4
9
0
9
6
1
0
2
1
0
8
1
1
4
1
2
0
1
2
6
1
3
2
1
3
8
1
4
4
1
5
0
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,00
0
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Replace the spark plugs – 6.4L
Engine.
2
X
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not
done at 150,000 miles (240,
000 km).
X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, monthly intervals do not apply.
Miles:
6,000
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
108,000
114,000
120,000
126,000
132,000
138,000
144,000
150,000
Or Months: 6
1
2
1
8
2
4
3
0
3
6
4
2
4
8
5
4
6
0
6
6
7
2
7
8
8
4
9
0
9
6
1
0
2
1
0
8
1
1
4
1
2
0
1
2
6
1
3
2
1
3
8
1
4
4
1
5
0
Or Kilometers:
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
3.6L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5.7L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal 6 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
6.2L SUPERCHARGED ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 11 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
6 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.4L ENGINE
1 — Remote Jump Start Positive Terminal 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
4 — Air Cleaner Filter 9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 10 — Remote Jump Start Negative Terminal
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. Check the oil level at regular
intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time
to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut
off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Always maintain the oil level within
the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart
of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the
SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of
the safe zone on these engines.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The instrument cluster display will indicate
when the washer fluid level is low. When the
sensor detects a low fluid level, the windshield
will light on the vehicle graphic outline and the
“WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be
displayed.
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
reservoir is located in the engine compartment,
be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe clean the wiper blades, this will
help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up
of your windshield washer system in cold
weather, select a solution or mixture that meets
or exceeds the temperature range of your
climate. This rating information can be found on
most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
ENGINE OIL
Change Engine Oil — Non-SRT
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Change Engine Oil — SRT
The oil change indicator system will remind you
that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. Refer to “Scheduled
Servicing” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or
6 months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection — Non-SRT
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (5.7L) at times can tick right after
startup and then quiet down after approxi-
mately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — SRT
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends full synthetic
engine oils that meet the American Petroleum
Institute (API) categories of SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of
Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 engine or equivalent
Mopar oil meeting the FCA Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil fill cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil fill
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section for further information.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (6.2L/6.4L) at times can tick right
after startup and then quiet down after approx-
imately 30 seconds. This is normal and will not
harm the engine. This characteristic can be
caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a
short distance. Upon restarting, you may experi-
ence a ticking sound. Other causes could be if
the vehicle is unused for an extended period of
time, incorrect oil, extended oil changes or
extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes
on, see the nearest authorized dealer.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends API
Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L
Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to the “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L
Engine
Mopar SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to the “Engine Compartment”
illustration in this section.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in
improper operation of the Fuel Saver Tech-
nology. Refer to “Fuel Saver Technology – If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity — 6.2L/6.4L Engine
Use Pennzoil Ultra Platinum 0W-40 engine or
equivalent Mopar oil meeting the FCA Material
Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating
temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section for further information.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Except 6.2L Supercharged
Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and/or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris, change the air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Release the spring clips from the air
cleaner cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Spring Clips
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
the housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air
cleaner cover to the housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — 6.2L Supercharged Engine
Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or
debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or
debris, you should change your air cleaner filter.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the fasteners on the air cleaner
filter cover.
Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
1 — Air Cleaner Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
1 — Fasteners
2 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
2. Lift the air filter cleaner cover to access the
air cleaner filter.
Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
the housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter Removal
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten the fasteners to lock the air cleaner
cover to the housing assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, the air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and
refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement (A/C
Air Filter)
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
Glove Compartment
2. There are glove compartment travel stops
on both sides of the glove compartment
door, partially close the glove compartment
door and push inward to release the glove
compartment travel stop on one side and
repeat this procedure for the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove
compartment door toward the rear of the
vehicle to disengage the glove
compartment door from its hinges.
NOTE:
When disengaging the glove compartment door
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose,
remove the glove compartment tension
tether and tether clip by sliding the clip
toward the face of the glove compartment
door and lifting the clip out of glove
compartment door.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
5. Remove the filter cover by disengaging the
retaining tab and mid way snap that
secures the filter cover to the HVAC
housing. Disengage the mid way snap by
pulling the door outward. Unhinge the filter
cover on the right side to fully remove the
cover.
A/C Air Filter Cover
6. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it
straight out of the housing.
7. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When
installing the filter cover, make sure the
retaining tabs fully engage the cover.
8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on
the door hinge and reattach the tension
tether by inserting the tether clip in the
glove compartment and sliding the clip
away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel
stops.
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
glove compartment travel stops are fully
engaged.
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Retaining Tab
2 — Mid Way Snap
3 — Filter Cover Hinge
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt
from rib to rib, are considered normal. These
are not a reason to replace belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib
must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if
it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe
glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken (note: identify and correct
problem before new belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade toward the right side of the vehicle to
separate the wiper blade from the wiper
arm).
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
release tab open and the blade side of the
wiper facing up and away from the
windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade
until it is flush against the wiper arm. Fold
down the latch release tab and snap it into
its locked position. Latch engagement will
be accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand hold the wiper arm
as you pull the wiper blade away from the
wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to
“Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further
information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
Under normal operating conditions, the
catalytic converter will not require
maintenance. However, it is important to keep
the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's
specifications, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the system
should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by
an authorized dealer. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and
tightness of the connection at the coolant
recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks. DO NOT REMOVE THE
COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING
SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage.
If any coolant is needed to be added to the
system please contact an authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze).
If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is
introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, the cooling system will need to
be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
(antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water.
Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)
are anticipated. Please contact an autho-
rized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
(Continued)
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the
“Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
proper maintenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within
the designated marks on the side of the
reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing cap. With disc brakes,
fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid is
abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only the
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the
transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid
(ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid
additives to the transmission. Avoid using
transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check the
transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
FRONT/REAR AXLE FLUID
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill
hole.
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill
hole.
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be
tightened to 22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further
information.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
transfer case assembly should be inspected. If
oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Adding Fluid
While the vehicle is in a level position, add fluid
at the filler hole until it runs out of the hole.
Drain
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
Recommended tightening torque for drain and
fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications” for further
information.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could
damage them and cause them to leak.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
could damage them and cause them to leak.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
Tire Terminology And Definitions
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
very important. Increased tire pressure and
reduced vehicle loading may be required for
high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol).
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 359
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is
not designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin
your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment
Distance driven
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
your tire will be found on the original equipment
tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 361
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall.
Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure
to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for
temporary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary
emergency use only. You can identify if your
vehicle is equipped with a collapsible spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 363
Collapsible spare tire description example:
165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the
collapsible tire using the electric air pump
before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the collapsible spare
wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically
for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing the vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with
wheel cleaner, drive the vehicle and apply the
brakes to remove the water droplets from the
brake components. This activity will remove the
red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES —
N
ON-SRT
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on rear tires only.
Due to limited clearance, Thule XG-12 Pro or
equivalent is recommended on P245/
70R17, 265/60R18 or 265/50R20 tires.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 365
(Continued)
(Continued)
TIRE CHAINS AND TRACTION DEVICES —
SRT
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on rear tires only.
Due to limited clearance, RUD-GRIP 4X4 or
Equivalent is recommended on 295/45R20
tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior
to rotation being performed.
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values
displayed in the correct vehicle position
following a tire rotation.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 367
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21
days, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle.
Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to
airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which
the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have
an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 369
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
LEATHER PARTS
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and
damage the leather upholstery and should be
removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and
Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to
avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based
cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar Total Clean leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as
needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
7
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on a label located on the left front corner of the
instrument panel pad, visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
Windshield VIN Label Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during
application, greater pedal force required to slow
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
NOTE:
Due to the performance nature of our brake
systems, some noise is to be expected.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Base Model Vehicle
SRT Model Vehicle
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
110 Ft-Lbs
(149 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 373
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it half way).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Torque Patterns
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.6L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
optimum fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the
(R+M)/2 method. The use of higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is not required, as it will not
provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see an dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
8
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.7L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded gasoline having an octane range of
87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is
recommended for optimum performance and
fuel economy.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
6.2L SUPERCHARGED AND 6.4L
E
NGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends
greater than 15% in this engine.
These engines are designed to meet
all emissions regulations, provide
optimal fuel economy and
performance when using high-quality
unleaded “Premium” gasoline having a posted
octane number of 91 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is required in these
engines.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 375
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
8
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
MMT IN GASOLINE
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and
California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 377
FLUID CAPACITIES — NON-SRT
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
5.7L Engine 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula or equivalent)
10.4 Quarts 9.9 Liters
5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
15.4 Quarts 14.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
16 Quarts 15.2 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
8
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES — SRT
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 24.6 Gallons 93.1 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
6.2L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 8.3 Quarts 7.8 Liters
6.4L Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified, MS-12633) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
Cooling System*
6.2L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
6.2L Engine Intercooler (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
(240,000 km) Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.)
4.0 Quarts 3.9 Liters
6.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)
16 Quarts 15.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 379
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — NON-SRT
ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar,
Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
8
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method,
0-15% Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 381
CHASSIS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function
or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Quadra-Trac I) We recommend you use Automatic Transmission Fluid 3353.
Transfer Case – Two-Speed (Quadra-Trac II)
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85 with friction modifier.
Axle Differential (Rear) – Without Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703
should be used.
8
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS — SRT
ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant or Genuine Part
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of
operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic
engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of
SN.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or
equivalent Mopar engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filters.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 6.2L/6.4L Engines
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or Higher (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
Ethanol (Do Not Use E-85).
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 383
CHASSIS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function
or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – Single-Speed (Selec-Track)
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85.
Axle Differential (Rear) – With Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD)
We recommend you use Mopar GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-85 with integrated friction modifier.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703
should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available,
then DOT 4 is acceptable.
If using DOT 4 brake fluid, the fluid must be changed every
24 months. This interval is time based only, mileage intervals do
not apply.
8
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
MULTIMEDIA 385
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data
Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the
instrument panel that allow you to access and
change the Customer Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle.
Uconnect 4 Buttons On Touchscreen And Buttons On
Faceplate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Buttons On Faceplate And
Buttons On Touchscreen
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
— U
CONNECT 4 SETTINGS
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features that may be equipped
such as Language, Display, Voice, Clock,
Safety/Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors &
Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine
Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®,
Suspension (if equipped), SiriusXM® Setup (if
equipped), Restore Settings to Default, and
Clear Personal Data.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
a time.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Once in the desired mode, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Once the setting is complete, either press the
Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or
push the Back button on the faceplate to return
to the previous menu or press the X button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings
screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the ON/RUN position.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
MULTIMEDIA 387
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, and then press the desired
language button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
On
- +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights On" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights
Off
- +
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights Off" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AutoShow Smartphone Display
Upon Connection — If Equipped
On Off
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never With Help Always
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync With GPS Time On Off
Set Time Hours - +
Set time Minutes - +
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
MULTIMEDIA 389
Safety/Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Set Date — If Equipped Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen displays the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay cancels if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera
Guidelines
On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 MULTIMEDIA
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid
a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning & Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of
potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning
Sensitivity — If Equipped
Far Med Near
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” will give you
the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with “Sound” or “Sound & Display.”
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Medium High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
MULTIMEDIA 391
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the Park Assist system detects objects located behind the vehicle and utilizes auton-
omous braking to stop the vehicle.
LaneSense Warning— If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane
departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors, or
it shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as plays an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system is
deactivated.
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not operating to spec-
ification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
Equipped
On Off
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Paddle Shifters — If Equipped Enable Disable
Steering Feel Options — If Equipped Sport Normal Comfort
NOTE:
The “Steering Feel Options” setting allows you to adjust the steering effort and feel. Press the Comfort button on the touchscreen to provide a balance
of steering feel and steering effort. Press the Normal button on the touchscreen to provide greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort. Press
the Sport button on the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steering feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob.
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto High Beam — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto High Beam” is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
MULTIMEDIA 393
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Door Locks” feature locks all doors automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position,
and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If
Equipped
On Off
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 MULTIMEDIA
Remote Door Unlock Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door unlocks on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button
twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors unlocks on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door
unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once only results in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s door is
opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry On Off
Memory Linked To FOB — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Memory Linked To FOB” feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering
column position, and radio station pre-sets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Liftgate Alert — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Power Liftgate Alert” feature plays an alert when the power liftgate is raising or lowering.
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
MULTIMEDIA 395
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel — If
Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn On when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Engine Off Power Delay — If
Equipped
0 sec 45 sec 5 min 10 min
NOTE:
When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect Phone system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut
OFF.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Easy Exit Seat” feature is selected, it provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Entry/Exit” feature automatically lowers the vehicle ride height position when shifted into PARK, when it is selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade
Up Arrow
Button
Down Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Arrow
Button
Center C Button
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Equalizer Mid Bass Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
MULTIMEDIA 397
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped -3 +3
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
When selecting the “Auto Play” subsetting, a message will pop up stating “USB devices will automatically play media when AutoPlay is turned On.”
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
NOTE:
Press “Do Not Disturb” to access the available settings. The following settings are: Auto Reply (Both, Text, Call), Auto Reply Message (Custom, Default),
and Custom Auto Reply Message (Create Message).
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display” in this section for further information.
Display Phone Info In Cluster — If Equipped Off On
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to
PARK for easy entry/exit.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
MULTIMEDIA 399
Display Suspension Messages — If Equipped All Warnings Only
NOTE:
The “Display Suspension Messages” setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display all suspension messages or to
only display suspension warnings.
Tire Jack Mode — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is
on a jack, changing a tire.
Transport Mode — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” setting prevents auto leveling of the air suspension while performing a wheel alignment service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start Off On
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
MULTIMEDIA 401
Restore Settings to Default
After pressing the Restore Settings to Default button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings to Default Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
— U
CONNECT 4C/4C NAV S ETTINGS
Press the Apps button, then press the Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Language, Display, Voice, Clock, Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance,
Mirrors and Wipers, Lights, Doors & Locks, Seats & Comfort (if equipped), Key Off Options, Suspension (if equipped), Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®,
SiriusXM® Setup (if equipped), Accessibility (if equipped), Reset, and System Information (if equipped).
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the
Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the available settings.
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Français Español
NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English/Français/Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
MULTIMEDIA 403
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness With Headlights
ON
+ -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights
OFF
+ -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme — If Equipped Selectable Options
NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on
the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Timeout — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Timeout” feature is selected, the Control Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the feature
deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 MULTIMEDIA
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed
in Cluster — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display
as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In
Cluster
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Never w/Help Always
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS On Off
Set Time Hours - +
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
MULTIMEDIA 405
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Set Time Minutes - +
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format
12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 MULTIMEDIA
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it remains off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid
a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected, a chime sound alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of
potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Sensitivity — If
Equipped
Near Med Far
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the system
warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you the least
amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane
departure.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
MULTIMEDIA 407
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
NOTE:
The “ParkSense” system setting scans for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less
than 7 mph (11 km/h), when enabled. It provides an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with “Sound” or “Sound & Display”.
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Equipped
Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Med High
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist — If
Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Rear ParkSense Braking Assist” feature is selected, the Park Assist system detects objects located behind the vehicle and utilizes auton-
omous braking to stop the vehicle.
Power Steering Default Normal Sport Comfort
NOTE:
When the “Electric Power Steering Default” is selected, it allows you to change the default setting of your vehicle to either Normal, Sport, or Comfort.
Paddle Shifters — If Equipped Enable Disable
Setting Name Selectable Options
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 MULTIMEDIA
Mirror and Wipers
After pressing the Mirror and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is activated and shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors,
or it shows a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as plays an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system is
deactivated. If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may
have become misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the BSM not
operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tilt Side Mirrors in Reverse On Off
Auto Folding Side Mirrors — If Equipped On Off
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Headlights with Wipers On Off
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
MULTIMEDIA 409
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Headlight Illuminated On Approach
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL (N) position, and the driver's
door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door unlocks with the first push of the key fob unlock button.
You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks,
all doors unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors”, all doors unlock
no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door
unlocks when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching the handle more
than once results in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is programmed, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
MULTIMEDIA 411
Seats & Comfort — If Equipped
After pressing the Seats & Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Personal Settings Linked to Key
Fob — If Equipped
On Off
NOTE:
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, steering column position, and radio
station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Power Lift Gate Alert — If
Equipped
On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated
Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn On when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Suspension — If Equipped
After pressing the Suspension button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Easy Exit Seat On Off
Engine Off Power Delay
0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
Headlight Off Delay
0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Entry/Exit Suspension” setting is selected, the vehicle automatically lowers from ride height position when the vehicle is shifted to
PARK for easy entry/exit.
Display Suspension Messages All Warning Only
NOTE:
The “Display Suspension Messages” setting allows you to choose whether you want the Suspension system to display all suspension messages, or
to only display suspension warnings.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
MULTIMEDIA 413
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Tire Jack Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Tire Jack Mode” setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension while the vehicle is
on a jack, changing a tire.
Transport Mode On Off
NOTE:
When the “Transport Mode” setting is selected, the Air Suspension system is disabled to assist with flat bed towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode On Off
NOTE:
The “Wheel Alignment Mode” setting prevents auto leveling of the Air Suspension while performing a wheel alignment service.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the “Speaker Icon” toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If
Equipped
On Off
AUX Volume Offset — If
Equipped
+ -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is connected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined call, text, or both, to any incoming call, or text, before sending it directly
to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
MULTIMEDIA 415
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Paired Phones and Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones and Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones and Audio Devices” feature shows which phones and audio sources are paired to the Phone and Audio Sources Settings system.
Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
Smartphone Projection Manager On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 MULTIMEDIA
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Subscription Information Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Information button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Video Button Readback On Off
NOTE:
The “Video Button Readback” feature announces a function prior to performing the action selected when using DVD/Blu-ray™ functions, when it is
activated. For example, when activated, and the Play button is selected, the system will announce “Play Button Selected”, and then once pressed
again the Play button will perform its action.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
MULTIMEDIA 417
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer to Default OK Cancel
Restore Settings to Default OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software License System Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Software License” screen will appear, displaying the system software license and version.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
SAFETY GUIDELINES
Ensure that all persons read this manual
carefully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
MULTIMEDIA 419
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
INTRODUCTION
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1. Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen
to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM can be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons on
the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2. Media
Press the Media button on the touchscreen
to access media sources such as USB De-
vice, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the re-
quested media is present.
3. Climate
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further details.
4. Apps
Press the Apps button on the touchscreen
to access Smartphone and Connected vehi-
cle options.
5. Controls
Press the Controls button on the touch-
screen to adjust the heated and vented
seats or heated steering wheel (if
equipped).
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 MULTIMEDIA
6. Phone
Press the Phone button on the touchscreen
to access the Uconnect Phone feature.
7. Settings
Press the Settings button on the touch-
screen to access the Uconnect Settings
menu.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
onto the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen,
bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in the Radio mode.
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
the screen and mute the radio. Push the
Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume/Power
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right,
provides a means to close the Direct Tune
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
MULTIMEDIA 421
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left Steering
Wheel Audio Control up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek Up
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next
listenable station or channel. During a Seek
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen
located at the bottom of the radio screen. The
Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is
available in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and
can be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station.
Once a number has been entered, any numbers
that are no longer possible (stations that cannot
be reached) will become deactivated/grayed
out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
bottom left on the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press the OK button, and the Direct
Tune screen will close. The system will
automatically tune to that station.
The selected Station or Channel number is
displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the six
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 MULTIMEDIA
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen.
You can switch between the two radio presets
by pressing the Arrow button located in the
upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset and returns to the main
radio screen.
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by
pressing the X button on the touchscreen when
in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio-equipped vehicles come with a
one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access
package, providing over 160 channels of the
best programming for all the places life takes
you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel
available on your radio, including all the
premium programming like Howard Stern,
every NFL® game, every MLB® game, every
NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
subscription included with the All Access trial,
you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer,
smartphone, or tablet. Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
Latino – a collection of Spanish-language
channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize
your favorite music channels
Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more
information
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will
automatically renew and bill at then-current
rates until you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349
to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement
for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All
fees and programming subject to change. Our
satellite service is available only to those at
least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous USA
and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also
available in PR (with coverage limitations).
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
MULTIMEDIA 423
Our Internet radio service is available
throughout our satellite service area and in AK.
© 2020 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Service available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Pre-View channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call:
1-888-539-7474
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets
Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see
Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather Jump, and fav button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen, any time during the Replay
mode.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 MULTIMEDIA
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen to pause the playing of live or
rewound content at any time. Play can be
resumed again by pressing of the Pause/Play
button on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content.
The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done
when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, can not be done for live content. A
continuous press of the FW button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The
Radio begins playing the content at the point at
which the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume playing of Live content.
Favorites
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to
activate the favorites menu, which will time out
in five seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X in the top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist, or song that is currently playing.
The Radio then uses this information to alert
you when either the favorite song, or favorite
artist are being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back Arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse
Screen.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
display a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the
Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
MULTIMEDIA 425
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
and down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio
screen.
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual
alert when one of your favorites is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Selections or
press the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to
be deleted.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 MULTIMEDIA
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
main menu or within the Settings main menu, to
activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto
Play, and Radio Off With Door.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the X located at the top right.
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between the
rear and front speakers.
Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons
or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to activate the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and
dragging over the level bar for each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the
bottom of each of the Bands.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
MULTIMEDIA 427
Speed Adjusted Volume
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
Volume screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increase to compensate
for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
activate Surround Sound. Press Off to
deactivate this feature.
When Surround Sound is On, you can hear
audio coming from every direction as in a movie
theatre or home theatre system.
Surround Sound
Loudness
Loudness
Press the On button on the touchscreen to
activate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this
feature.
When Loudness is On, the sound quality at
lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
of the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Play
Auto Play
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen
to activate the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings On and
Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play
from a connected device, immediately after it is
connect to the radio.
Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door
Press the Radio Off With Door button on the
touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door
screen.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when
activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened, or when the Radio
Off Delay selected time has expired.
MEDIA MODE
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB device or iPod® and cable into the USB
Port or by pressing the Select Source button on
the left side of the display, and then selecting
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection or to return to
the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device/iPod® is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
MULTIMEDIA 429
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
display the browse window. The left side of the
browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse
window shows items and its sub-functions,
which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
is active. Press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in
random order to provide an interesting change
of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When
in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start
playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch
to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the
Uconnect System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect System.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect
Phone section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select
Source button on the left side of the display,
and then select Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® Mode
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature,
press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® — If
Equipped
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
MULTIMEDIA 431
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s
touchscreen to control many of your apps. To
use Android Auto™, follow the following
procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in, the app will begin to
download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the “Phone” icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ Icon. Android Auto™ should launch,
but if it does not, refer to “Android Auto™
And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this
section for the procedure to enable the
feature “AutoShow”. You can also launch it
by touching the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-Free Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
Hundred of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™ and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto™ Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US Residents) https:/
/www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto (Canadian
Residents).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Android Auto™ Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Android Auto™ Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto™.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Android Auto™ Apps
The Android Auto™ App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with Android Auto™.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
MULTIMEDIA 433
Refer to https://play.google.com/store/apps/
to see the latest list of available apps for
Android Auto™.
Apple CarPlay® Integration
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the “Phone” icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon. Apple CarPlay® should
launch, but if not, refer to “Android Auto™
And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this
section for the procedure to enable the
feature “AutoShow”. You can also touch the
Apple CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen to
launch it.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 MULTIMEDIA
Apple CarPlay® Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you
to make calls or listen to voice mail as you
normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes®.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts and more.
Apple CarPlay® Messages
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri
can also read incoming text messages, but
drivers will not be able to read messages, as
everything is done via voice.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
To use your Apple® Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and
push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a category,
by launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held,
and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR
prompts you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple CarPlay® Apps
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically begins playing music off of
the connected device, as soon as it is
connected. This feature can be turned on or off
in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
NOTE:
AutoPlay® is not supported by Android Auto™.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
MULTIMEDIA 435
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first
time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone will automatically pair to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with
Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and
USB connections to function, and the
connected device will be unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is
connected to a media USB, and there is
another device plugged in, you will need to
manually change the configuration of the
USB connection in order for the Samsung
device to send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will
be unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay® are in use.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on
Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all
mobile phones [requires Bluetooth® Message Ac-
cess Profile (MAP) profile]
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features:
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free text message replying. (Forward
one of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show incoming
calls,” “Show outgoing calls,” “Show missed
calls,” “Show recent calls”).
Searching contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided
throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the
Voice Command Quick Reference Section.
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the main phone
screen.
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listening to music on your Bluetooth® device
via the touchscreen.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call:
800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
MULTIMEDIA 437
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect
Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase), as long as your phone is turned on
and has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked
to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with
the system at a time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing
calls, view phonebook etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call and you want to
send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect
Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
vehicle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 MULTIMEDIA
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the
system requires more information from the user
it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if
active) on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel when
the system is listening for a command and be
returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth®-enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
MULTIMEDIA 439
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the “Phone Set-
tings” button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Select “Paired Phones”, and then press
the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Ucon-
nect system may interfere with the Bluetooth®
connection. If this happens, simply repeat the
pairing process. However, first, make sure to
delete the device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 MULTIMEDIA
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, enter the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
MULTIMEDIA 441
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or Audio Device follow these
steps:
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Sources button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the
particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will
appear, press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
Phone or Audio Device than the currently
connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Delete Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically
downloads names (text names) and number
entries from the mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook
Access Profile may support this feature.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 MULTIMEDIA
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phone book, follow the procedure in the
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
section.
Automatic download and update of a phone
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the down arrow symbol button next to the
selected number to display the options
pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to
Favorites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
MULTIMEDIA 443
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
phone call with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
associated with John Doe, or if there are
multiple numbers it will ask which number
you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press Call.
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the
steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone
End) press the VR button to send a touch-tone
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 MULTIMEDIA
These can be accessed by pressing the recent
calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and say “Show my incoming
calls” from any screen and the incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent”, or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the Answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone.
Press the Uconnect Phone button on the
steering wheel, answer button on the
touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold button on
the Phone main screen.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
MULTIMEDIA 445
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls”
in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
“Join Calls” in this section.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Phone End button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last 10
SMS messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 MULTIMEDIA
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least
½ inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name
recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
MULTIMEDIA 447
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose
connection to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least 15
seconds prior to using the system.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status while
operating on off-road conditions. It supplies
information relating to the vehicle ride height,
the status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll
of the vehicle (if equipped), and the active
Selec-Terrain mode.
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
“Off-Road Pages”.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
Vehicle Dynamics
Suspension
Pitch & Roll — If Equipped
Accessory Gauge
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
1 — Off-Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the five selectable page options. It
provides continually updating information for
the following items:
Current Transfer Case Status (only appears
when in 4WD LOW)
Current Selec-Terrain mode — If Equipped
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Hill Descent
Selec-Speed Control and Selected Speed in
mph (km/h)
Status Bar
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays
information concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
1 — Transfer Case Status (Only When In 4WD
LOW)
2 — Selec-Terrain Mode — If Equipped
3 — Current Latitude/Longitude
4 — Current Altitude
5 — Hill Descent
6 — Selec-Speed Status And Set Speed
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle Locker Status
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
MULTIMEDIA 449
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
The following information is displayed:
Suspension Articulation Indicator
Current Ride Height Status — If Equipped
Normal
Off-Road 1
Off-Road 2
Entry/Exit
Aero
NOTE:
The wheel articulation will be represented by a
yellow color in the Suspension Articulation Indi-
cator. If Ride Height is adjusted, the Ride Height
indicator on the screen will switch to the appro-
priate height and the Suspension Articulation
Indicator will show the movement and change
in height.
Suspension Menu
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll
gauges provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu
1 — Suspension Articulation Indicator
2 — Current Ride Height
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGES
The Accessory Gauges page displays the
current status of the vehicle’s Coolant
Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil Pressure
(Gas Vehicles Only), Transmission Temperature,
and Battery Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
The Selec-Terrain page displays the current
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will
alter the image on the screen. The vehicle must
be in the ON/RUN position to display
Selec-Terrain information.
The selectable modes are as follows:
Snow
Sand
Auto — Default
Mud
Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD LOW
NOTE:
While in the Selec-Terrain pages, the Off-Road
Pages Status Bar will also display the current
Selec-Terrain mode.
Current Selec-Terrain Mode
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
MULTIMEDIA 451
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Steering Wheel Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases
the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button makes the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.)
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
RADIO OPERATION
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next listenable station, and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
MEDIA MODE
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
IPOD®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB
device to be plugged into the USB port.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in
the Owner’s Manual Supplement.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, iPod
nano®, 5G iPod®, and iPhone® devices. Some
iPod® software versions may not fully support
the iPod® control features. Please visit
Apple’s® website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
CONNECTING THE IPOD® OR EXTERNAL
USB D
EVICE
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod®
or external USB device to the vehicles USB/AUX
connector port which is located in the center
console.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 MULTIMEDIA
The USB ports on the media hub are equipped
with a Smart Electronic Voltage Regulator
(Smart Charge) feature. This feature allows a
device to charge for up to one hour after the
vehicle is powered off.
Integrated Center Console USB/AUX Media HUB
Once the audio device is connected and
synchronized to the vehicles iPod®/USB/MP3
control system (iPod® or external USB device
may take a few minutes to connect), the audio
device starts charging and is ready for use.
NOTE:
If the audio device battery is completely
discharged, it may not communicate with the
iPod®/USB/MP3 control system until a
minimum charge is attained. Leaving the audio
device connected to the iPod®/USB/MP3
control system may charge it to the required
level.
USING THIS FEATURE
By using an iPod® cable or an external USB
device to connect to the USB port:
The audio device can be played on the
vehicle’s sound system, providing metadata
(artist, track title, album, etc.) information on
the radio display.
The audio device can be controlled using the
radio buttons to Play, Browse, and List the
iPod® contents.
The audio device battery charges when
plugged into the USB/AUX connector (if
supported by the specific audio device).
NOTE:
For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
SECOND ROW USB CHARGING PORT
Second row USB connector ports can be used
for charging purposes only. Use the connection
cable to connect an iPod® or external USB
device to the vehicle’s USB charging ports
which are located on the rear of the front center
console.
Front Center Console Rear USB Ports
1 — USB Port One
2 — AUX Port
3 — USB Port Two
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
MULTIMEDIA 453
UCONNECT REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
(RSE) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Your Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System is
designed to give your family years of enjoyment.
You can play your favorite CDs, DVDs or
Blu-ray™ Discs, listen to audio over the wireless
headphones, or plug and play a variety of
standard video games or audio devices.
Please review this Owner's Manual to become
familiar with its features and operation.
GETTING STARTED
Screen(s) located in the rear of front seats:
Open the LCD screen cover by lifting up on
the cover.
RSE System Screen
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Blu-ray™ disc player. If equipped with a
Blu-ray™ disc player, the icon will be present
on the player.
Turn on the Rear Seat Entertainment System
by pushing the power button on the remote
control.
When the Video Screen(s) are open and a
DVD/Blu-ray™ disc is inserted into the disc
player, the screen(s) turn(s) on automatically,
the headphone transmitters turn on, and
playback begins.
RSE System Channel 1 (Rear 1)
With the Dual Video Screen System, Channel
1 (Rear 1) on the remote control and head-
phones, refers to Screen 1 (driver's side) and
Channel 2 (Rear 2) on the remote control and
Headphones refers to Screen 2 (passenger
side).
RSE System Headphone Channel Selectors
The system can be controlled either by the
front seat occupants utilizing the touch-
screen radio or by the rear seat occupants
using the remote control.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 MULTIMEDIA
DUAL VIDEO SCREEN
NOTE:
Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Rear Seat Entertainment
System:
The Remote Control
The Touchscreen Radio (If Equipped)
BLU-RAY™ DISC PLAYER
Play A Blu-ray™ Disc
The Blu-ray™ disc player is located in the center
console.
Blu-ray™ Disc Player Location
1. Insert a Blu-ray™ disc into the Video
Entertainment System disc player with the
label facing as indicated on the Blu-ray™
player. The radio automatically selects the
appropriate mode after the disc is
recognized and displays the menu screen,
the language screen, or starts playing the
first track.
2. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Rear 1 for
driver's side rear passengers, ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Rear 1.
3. To watch a Blu-ray™ disc on Rear 2 for
passenger side rear passengers, ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone switch is
on Rear 2.
NOTE:
To view a Blu-ray™ disc on the radio, press
the Media button on the touchscreen, and
then press the Disc button. Press the Play
button, and then the Full Screen button.
Viewing a Blu-ray™ disc on the radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces. The
vehicle must be stopped, and the gear
selector must be in the PARK (P) position for
vehicles with automatic transmission.
Using The Touchscreen Radio
Rear Media Control Screen
1. RSE Channel 1 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen
1/Channel 1. This button will be highlighted
when it is the active Screen/Channel being
controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select the button to access
controls for Screen 1/Channel 1 source.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
MULTIMEDIA 455
2. RSE Power
Press to turn RSE On/Off.
3. RSE Mute
Mute rear headphones for the current igni-
tion cycle. Pressing mute again will unmute
rear headphones.
4. RSE Remote Control Lock-Out
Press to enable/disable remote control
functions.
5. RSE Channel 2 Mode
Indicates the current source for Screen 2/
Channel 2. This button will be highlighted
when it is the active Screen/Channel being
controlled by the front user. If this button is
not highlighted, select the button to access
controls for Screen 2/Channel 2 source.
6. Cabin Audio Mode
Select this button to change the cabin audio
to the rear entertainment source currently
shown on the rear media control screen.
7. Radio Full Screen Mode
Select this button to change to Full Screen
Mode.
8. RSE Mode
Select this button to change the source for
the active (highlighted) rear Screen/Chan-
nel on the rear media control screen.
Press the Media button on the touchscreen,
and then press the rear media button on the
touchscreen.
Press the OK button on the touchscreen to
begin playing the Blu-ray™ disc on the touch-
screen radio.
Using The Remote Control
Select an audio channel (Rear 1 for driver’s
side rear screen and Rear 2 for passenger’s
side rear screen), and then press the source
key. Using the up and down arrows, highlight
disc from the menu and press the OK button.
Press the pop-up/menu key to navigate the
disc menu and options.
PLAY VIDEO GAMES
Connect the video game console to the Audio/
Video RCA/HDMI input jacks located on the side
of each seat.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Jacks (AUX/HDMI
Jacks) on the side of each seat enable the
monitor to display video directly from a video
camera, connect video games for display on the
screen, or play music directly from an MP3
player.
Audio/Video RCA/HDMI Input Jacks
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456 MULTIMEDIA
When connecting an external source to the
AUX/HDMI input, be sure to follow the standard
color coding for the audio/video jacks:
1. Right audio in (red)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Video in (yellow)
4. HDMI Input
NOTE:
Certain high-end video games’ consoles may
exceed the power limit of the vehicle's Power
Inverter.
PLAY A DVD/B LU-RAY™ DISC USING
T
HE TOUCHSCREEN RADIO
1. Insert the DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc with the label
facing as indicated on the DVD/Blu-ray™
Disc player. The radio automatically
selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu
screen or starts playing the first track.
2. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 1
(driver’s side rear passenger), ensure the
Remote Control and Headphone channel
selector switch is on Rear 1.
3. To watch a DVD/Blu-ray™ Disc on Rear 2
(passenger’s side rear passenger), ensure
the Remote Control and Headphone
channel selector switch is on Rear 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Push the SOURCE button on the Remote
Control.
2. While looking at Rear 1 or 2, highlight DISC
by either pushing Up/Down/Left/Right
buttons, then push ENTER/OK.
Select DISC Mode On The Rear Seat Entertainment
Screen
Using The Touchscreen Radio Controls
1. Press the Media button on the Uconnect
system touchscreen.
2. Press the Rear Media button to display the
Rear Media Control screen.
Rear Media Control Screen
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
MULTIMEDIA 457
3. Press the 1 or 2 buttons on the touchscreen
and then the select source button on the
touchscreen. Press the Disc button on the
touchscreen in the Media column. To exit,
press the X at the top right of the screen.
Rear Seat Entertainment Source Screen
NOTE:
Pressing the screen on the radio while a DVD or
Blu-ray™ Disc is playing brings up the basic
remote control functions for DVD play such as
scene selection, Play, Pause, FF, RW, and Stop.
Pressing the X in the upper corner will turn off
the remote control screen functions.
IMPORTANT NOTES FOR DUAL VIDEO
S
CREEN SYSTEM
The Rear Seat Entertainment System is able
to transmit two channels of stereo audio and
video simultaneously.
The Blu-ray™ Disc Player can play CDs, DVDs,
and Blu-ray™ Discs.
Selecting a video source on Rear 1, the video
source will display on Rear 1 and can be
heard on Rear 1.
Selecting a video source on Rear 2, the video
source will display on Rear 2 and can be
heard on Rear 2.
Audio can be heard through the headphones
even when the screen(s) are closed.
BLU-RAY™ DISC PLAYER REMOTE
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Blu-ray™ Player Remote Control
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458 MULTIMEDIA
Controls And Indicators
1. Power — Turns the screen and wireless
headphone transmitter for the selected
Channel on or off. To hear audio while the
screen is closed, push the Power button to
turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators — When a
button is pushed, the currently affected
channel or channel button is illuminated
momentarily.
3. SOURCE — Push to enter Source Selection
screen.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch —
Indicates which channel is being controlled
by the remote control. When the selector
switch is in the Rear 1 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 1 (left screen). When the selector
switch is in the Rear 2 position, the remote
controls the functionality of headphone
Channel 2 (right screen).
5.
▸ — Push to navigate menus.
6. SETUP — Push to access the screen settings
menu.
7.
▸▸׀ — Push and hold to fast forward through
the current audio track or video chapter.
8.
▸ / ‖ (Play/Pause) — Begin/resume or
pause disc play.
9. Four Colored Buttons — Push to access
Blu-ray™ Disc features.
10. POPUP/MENU — Push to bring up repeat
and shuffle options, the Blu-ray™ Disc
pop-up menu, the DVD title menu, or to
access disc menus.
11. Keypad — Push to navigate chapters or
titles.
12. (Stop) — Stops disc play.
13.
׀◂◂ — Push and hold to fast rewind through
the current audio track or video chapter.
14. — Mutes headphone audio.
15. BACK — Push to exit out of menus or return
to source selection screen.
16.
▾ — Push to navigate menus.
17.
◂ — Push to navigate menus.
18. OK— Push to select the highlighted option in
a menu.
19.
▴ — Push to navigate menus.
HEADPHONES OPERATION
The headphones receive two separate channels
of audio using an infrared transmitter from the
video screen.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume
control, verify that the screen is turned on, the
channel is not muted, and the headphone
channel selector switch is on the desired
channel.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
MULTIMEDIA 459
If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
Rear Seat Entertainment Headphones
CONTROLS
The headphone power indicator and controls
are located on the right ear cup.
NOTE:
The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To
conserve battery life, the headphones will auto-
matically turn off approximately three minutes
after the rear video system is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/
screen selector switch is in the same
position as the headphone selector switch.
NOTE:
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 1, the Remote is controlling
Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio on Channel 1.
When both the headphone and the remote
control channel selector switches are on
Channel 2, the remote is controlling
Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio on Channel 2.
2. Push the Source button on the remote
control.
3. Pushing the Source button will advance to
the next mode.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on
screen, use the cursor buttons on the
remote control to navigate to the available
modes and push the Ok button to select the
new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu,
push the Back button on the remote control.
REPLACING THE HEADPHONE
B
ATTERIES
Each set of headphones requires two AAA
batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Locate the battery compartment on the left
ear cup of the headphones, and then slide
the battery cover downward.
2. Replace the batteries, making sure to orient
them according to the polarity diagram
shown.
3. Replace the battery compartment cover.
1 — Power Button
2 — Volume Control
3 — Channel Selection Switch
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSIBILITY — IF EQUIPPED
Accessibility is a feature of the DVD/Blu-ray™
system that announces a function prior to
performing the action. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
STEREO HEADPHONE LIFETIME LIMITED
W
ARRANTY
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty
covers the initial user or purchaser ("you" or
"your") of this particular Aptiv PLC (“Aptiv”)
wireless headphone ("Product"). The warranty is
not transferable.
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This
warranty lasts as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as
specified below, this warranty covers any
Product that in normal use is defective in
workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This
warranty does not cover any damage or defect
that results from misuse, abuse, or modification
of the Product other than by Aptiv. Foam
earpieces, which will wear over time through
normal use, are specifically not covered
(replacement foam is available for a nominal
charge). APTIV IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY
INJURIES OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR
PROPERTY RESULTING FROM THE USE OF, OR
ANY FAILURE OR DEFECT IN, THE PRODUCT,
NOR IS APTIV LIABLE FOR ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR
OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR NATURE
WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of
incidental or consequential damages, so the
above limitation may not apply to you. This
warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may
also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Aptiv Do? Aptiv, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Aptiv
reserves the right to replace any discontinued
Product with a comparable model. THIS
WARRANTY IS THE SOLE WARRANTY FOR THIS
PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE PRODUCTS,
AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES
(EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY FOR MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments
regarding your Aptiv wireless headphones,
please email hpser[email protected] or phone:
888-293-3332.
System Information
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc,
pushing the remote control’s Pop-Up/Menu
button displays a list of all commands which
control playback of the disc.
Display Settings
Video Screen Display Settings
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
MULTIMEDIA 461
When watching a video source (Blu-ray™ Disc or
DVD Video with the disc in Play mode, AUX
Video, etc.), pushing the remote control’s
SETUP button activates the Display Settings
menu. These settings control the appearance of
the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so
there is no need to change these settings under
normal circumstances.
To change the settings, push the remote
control’s Navigation buttons (
▴, ▾) to select an
item, then push the remote control’s Navigation
buttons (
▸, ◂) to change the value for the
currently selected item. To reset all values back
to the original settings, select the Default
Settings menu option and push the remote
control’s ENTER/OK button.
Disc Features control the remote Blu-ray™ Disc
player's settings of DVD being watched in the
remote player.
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only the audio portion of the channel
with the screen closed:
Set the audio to the desired source and
channel.
Close the video screen.
To change the current audio mode, push the
remote control’s Source button. This will
automatically select the next available audio
mode without using the Mode/Source Select
menu.
When the screen is reopened, the video
screen will automatically turn back on and
show the appropriate display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio
heard, verify that the headphones are turned on
(the On indicator is illuminated) and the
headphone selector switch is on the desired
channel. If the headphones are turned on, push
the remote control’s power button to turn audio
on. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the
headphones.
Disc Formats
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing
the following types of 4.7-inch (12-centimeter)
diameter discs:
BD: BDMV (Profile 1.1), BDAV (Profile 1.1)
DVD: DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, AVCREC,
AVCHD, DVD-VR
CD: CD-DA, VCD, CD-TEXT
DVD/CD: MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX
(versions 3 – 6) profile 3.0
DVD Region Codes
The Blu-ray™ Disc player and many DVD discs
are coded by geographic region. These region
codes must match in order for the disc to play.
If the region code for the DVD disc does not
match the region code for the player, the disc
will not play.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the
Blu-ray™ Disc player, the DVD-Audio title on the
disc is played by default (most DVD-Audio discs
also have a Video title, but the Video title is
ignored). All multi-channel program material is
automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume
level. If you increase the volume level to
account for this change in level, remember to
lower the volume before changing the disc or to
another mode.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462 MULTIMEDIA
Recorded Discs
The Blu-ray™ Disc player will play CD-R and
CD-RW discs recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD
format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA
files. The player will also play DVD-Video content
recorded to a DVD-R or DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM
discs (either pressed or recorded) are not
supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer,
there may be cases where the Blu-ray™ Disc
player may not be able to play some or the
entire disc, even if it is recorded in a compatible
format and is playable on other players. To help
avoid playback problems, use the following
guidelines when recording discs:
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions
that are closed are playable.
For multi-session CDs that contain only
multiple CD-Audio sessions, the player will
renumber the tracks so each track number is
unique.
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use
the ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or
Romeo format. Other formats (such as UDF,
HFS, or others) are not supported.
The player recognizes a maximum of 512
files and 99 folders per CD-R and CD-RW
disc.
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will
only play the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that
is playable in the Blu-ray™ Disc player, check
with the disc recording software publisher for
more information about burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling
recordable discs (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is
with a permanent marker. Do not use adhesive
labels as they may separate from the disc,
become stuck, and cause permanent damage
to the DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The Blu-ray™ Disc player is capable of playing
MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3) and WMA
(Windows Media Audio) files from a CD Data
disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
The Blu-ray™ Disc player always uses the file
extension to determine the audio format, so
MP3 files must always end with the extension
".mp3" or ".MP3" and WMA files must always
end with the extension ".wma" or ".WMA".
To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data
(such as artist name, track title, album, etc.)
are supported.
Any file that is copy protected (such as those
downloaded from many online music stores)
will not play. The Blu-ray™ player will auto-
matically skip the file and begin playing the
next available file.
Other compression formats such as AAC,
MP3 Pro, Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not
play. The Blu-ray™ player will automatically
skip the file and begin playing the next avail-
able file.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
MULTIMEDIA 463
If you are creating your own files, the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for MP3 files is
between 96 and 192 Kbps and the recom-
mended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192 Kbps. Variable bit rates
are also supported. For both formats, the
recommended sample rate is either 44.1 kHz
or 48 kHz.
To change the current file, use the remote
control’s or Blu-ray™ Disc player’s ? button to
advance to the next file, or the ? button to
return to the start of the current or previous
file.
Disc Errors
If the Blu-ray™ Disc player is unable to read the
disc, a "Disc Error" message is displayed on the
rear screen and Radio displays. A dirty,
damaged, or incompatible disc format are all
potential causes for a "Disc Error" message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in
audible or visible errors that persists for two
seconds, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will attempt
to continue playing the disc by skipping forward
one to three seconds at a time. If the end of the
disc is reached, the Blu-ray™ Disc player will
return to the beginning of the disc and attempt
to play the start of the first track.
The Blu-ray™ Disc player may shut down during
extremely hot conditions, such as when the
vehicle’s interior temperature is above 120°F
(48.9°C). When this occurs, the player will
display "High Temp" and will shut off the rear
seat displays until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect
the optics of the Blu-ray™ Disc player.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by US patents and
other intellectual property rights. Use of this
copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for
home or other limited viewing uses otherwise
authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby Digital and MLP Lossless
Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "MLP
Lossless", and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential
unpublished works. Copyright 1992-1997
Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464 MULTIMEDIA
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
MULTIMEDIA 465
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
INTRODUCING UCONNECT
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect 4 or Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV system.
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or in
the Apps menu, of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C With 8.4-inch display
system.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466 MULTIMEDIA
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to find
phone pairing instructions.
Reduce background noise. Wind and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The micro-
phones are positioned in the headliner and
aimed at the driver.
Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your VR
system’s status. Cues appear on the
touchscreen.
RADIO
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button and say “Help.” The system provides
you with a list of commands.
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send, Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media,
Or Climate Functions. For Uconnect 4C NAV Sys-
tem Only: Push To Begin Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
MULTIMEDIA 467
MEDIA
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands and follow the
prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your USB device. Your
Voice Command must match exactly how the
artist, album, song, and genre information is
displayed.
PHONE
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions.
Push the Phone button . After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previous incoming phone
number)
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button and say “Call,” then
pronounce the name exactly as it appears in
your phone book.
When a contact has multiple phone numbers,
you can say “Call John Smith work.”
VOICE TEXT REPLY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if
enabled) and say “Listen.” (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect
system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the VR button
or Phone button
(if enabled). After the beep, say: “Reply
.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined
messages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467
468 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed, otherwise the
system does not transpose the message.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on
your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
“User Manual”.
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
CLIMATE
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with
climate control.)
Push the VR button . After the beep, say one
of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to
70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to
70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for Climate may only be used
to adjust the interior temperature of your
vehicle. Voice Command will not work to adjust
the heated seats or steering wheel if equipped.
NAVIGATION (4C NAV) — I F EQUIPPED
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when you
know exactly how to get to where you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800
Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a POI search, push the VR button .
After the beep, say: “Find nearest coffee shop.”
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468
MULTIMEDIA 469
SIRI® EYES FREE — IF EQUIPPED
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls and
much more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were
using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
ANDROID AUTO™ — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen.
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469
470 MULTIMEDIA
Connect your Android™ 5.0 or higher to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-provided
USB cable, and press the new Android Auto™
icon that replaces your “Phone” icon on the
main menu bar to begin Android Auto™. Push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel, or
press and hold the “Microphone” icon within
Android Auto™, to activate Android’s™ VR,
which recognizes natural voice commands, to
use a list of your smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY® — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone
to project your iPhone® and many apps onto
your Uconnect touchscreen (smartphone’s data
plan will be used for certain apps). Connect your
iPhone® 5 or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the Apple® factory-provided
Lightning cable, and press the new Apple
CarPlay® icon that replaces your Phone icon on
the main menu bar to begin Apple CarPlay®.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the Home button
within Apple CarPlay®, to activate Siri, which
recognizes natural voice commands to use
certain iPhone’s® features such as:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps (if equipped)
Additional Apps (if equipped)
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470
MULTIMEDIA 471
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science, and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days
a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visitwww.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visitwww.siriusxm.ca/
guardian-v1/ or call: 1-877-324-9091
9
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471
472
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss
additional charges with the service manager.
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to
the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 473
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
IN MEXICO CONTACT
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/
TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
special Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
10
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 473
474 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further
information.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar original equipment parts & accessories
and factory filled fluids are available from an
authorized dealer. They are recommended for
your vehicle to keep it operating at its best and
maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://
www.safercar.gov
; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov .
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 474
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 475
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP .
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
10
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 475
476 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
RADIO FREQUENCY STATEMENT
The following regulatory statement
applies to all Radio Frequency (RF)
devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 476
477
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .........................................372
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ..............................................214
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............347
Adding Fuel ....................................................257
Additives, Fuel ...............................................374
Adjust
Forward ....................................................... 37
Rearward..................................................... 37
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ......................................155
Air Bag Warning Light ................................153
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................156
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 160, 315
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................315
Front Air Bag .............................................154
If Deployment Occurs ................................159
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................156
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............161
Maintenance .............................................161
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............154
Side Air Bags .............................................156
Transporting Pets ......................................177
Air Bag Light ........................................ 153 , 178
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air
Cleaner Filter) ............................................... 335
Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 337
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 337 , 338
Air Conditioner System ................................. 337
Air Conditioning ................................................64
Air Conditioning Filter ........... 66, 335, 336, 338
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................65
Air Filter ........................................................ 335
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 357
Alarm
Arm The System
...................................25 , 26
Disarm The System .....................................25
Rearm The System ......................................26
Security Alarm ....................................24 , 109
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
.........................................................12
Ambient Light ...................................................54
Android Auto ................................................. 469
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........346, 377, 378
Disposal ................................................... 348
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 119
Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 109
Apple CarPlay ................................................ 470
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 126
Audio Settings ............................................... 426
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 384
Auto Down Power Windows ..............................67
Auto Up Power Windows ..................................68
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................46
Automatic Door Locks ......................................31
Automatic Headlights .......................................52
Automatic High Beams .....................................51
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............65
Automatic Transmission .......................181 , 190
Adding Fluid .............................................. 350
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 350
Fluid Change ............................................. 350
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 350
Fluid Type ...............................350 , 381, 383
Gear Ranges ............................................. 191
Special Additives ...................................... 350
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ... 194
Aux Mode ...................................................... 429
Auxiliary Driving Systems .............................. 131
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........85
Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................85
Axle Fluid..............................................381 , 383
11
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 477
478
B
Battery
................................................. 107 , 331
Charging System Light ...............................107
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 16
Battery Saver Feature ......................................53
Belts, Seat .....................................................178
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................131
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
......446
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing .....441
Bluetooth Mode .............................................430
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................340
B-Pillar Location .............................................356
Brake Assist System ......................................120
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................120
Brake Fluid ................................. 349 , 381, 383
Brake System ...................................... 349 , 372
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................372
Fluid Check ...............................................349
Master Cylinder .........................................349
Parking ......................................................186
Warning Light ............................................106
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......................189
Break-In Recommendations,
New Vehicle ......................................... 185 , 186
Bulb Replacement .........................................286
Bulbs, Light ....................................................180
C
Camera, Rear ................................................ 255
Capacities, Fluid .................................. 377 , 378
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine)
...................................... 327 , 334
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 347
Car Washes................................................... 369
Carbon Monoxide Warning ................... 178 , 376
Cargo Area Cover .............................................77
Cargo Compartment ........................................77
Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................78
Cellular Phone .............................................. 463
Certification Label ......................................... 258
Chains, Tire .......................................... 364 , 365
Changing A Flat Tire ............................. 298 , 351
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 353
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light)
.............................................. 118
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 177
Checks, Safety .............................................. 177
Child Restraint .............................................. 162
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 165
Child Seat Installation .............................. 175
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 172
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 164
LATCH Positions ....................................... 167
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 167
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 164
Seating Positions ...................................... 166
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 374
Cleaning
Wheels
...................................................... 363
Climate Control ................................................58
Automatic ....................................................59
Cold Weather Operation ................................ 185
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 362
Console
Storage ........................................................84
Console, Overhead ...........................................85
Contract, Service ........................................... 473
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 347
Cooling System ............................................. 345
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 347
Coolant Level ............................................ 348
Cooling Capacity .............................. 377 , 378
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 348
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 346
Inspection ........................................346 , 348
Points To Remember ................................ 348
Pressure Cap ............................................ 347
Radiator Cap ............................................. 347
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ...... 346, 377, 378, 379, 382
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 368
Cruise Control (Speed Control) .............212, 214
Cruise Light .......................................... 114 , 116
Cupholders.......................................................85
Customer Assistance .................................... 472
Cybersecurity ................................................ 384
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 478
479
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 51
Dealer Service ...............................................332
Defroster, Windshield ....................................179
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................117
Dimmer Control Switch .................................... 55
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
................................................331
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................312
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.......................348
Disturb...........................................................444
Do Not Disturb ...............................................469
Door Ajar.............................................. 107 , 108
Door Ajar Light ..................................... 107 , 108
Door Locks
Automatic .................................................... 31
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 34
Driving ...........................................................276
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) ....453
E
Economy (Fuel) Mode ....................................190
Electric Brake Control System .......................120
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................119
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 121 , 128
Electric Remote Mirrors ................................... 48
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........85
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......212
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ...................122
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ...... 107
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 308
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ..................... 311
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 281
Jacking ............................................ 298 , 351
Jump Starting ........................................... 305
Tow Hooks ................................................ 314
Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 118
Engine........................................................... 327
Air Cleaner ................................................ 335
Block Heater ............................................. 185
Break-In Recommendations ............ 185, 186
Checking Oil Level .................................... 331
Compartment ................327, 328, 329, 330
Compartment
Identification .............327, 328, 329, 330
Coolant (Antifreeze) ......................... 379 , 382
Cooling ..................................................... 345
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 178 , 376
Fails To Start ............................................ 184
Flooded, Starting ...................................... 184
Fuel Requirements ................................... 373
Jump Starting ........................................... 305
Oil ........................ 332 , 377, 378, 379, 382
Oil Filler Cap .................................... 327 , 334
Oil Filter .................................................... 335
Oil Reset ......................................................95
Oil Selection ...........................333 , 377, 378
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 334
Overheating .............................................. 308
Starting ..................................................... 181
Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 334
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart .............................. 334
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature
................................................ 160 , 315
Ethanol.......................................................... 375
Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 178 , 376
Exhaust System ...................................178 , 344
Exterior Lights ........................................ 50 , 180
F
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 335
Air Conditioning ...............66, 335, 336, 338
Engine Oil ...............................335 , 379, 382
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 334
Flashers ........................................................ 281
Hazard Warning ........................................ 281
Turn Signals ............................115 , 180, 290
Flash-To-Pass ...................................................52
Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 184
Fluid Capacities ................................... 377 , 378
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 180
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ........................................................ 349
Fluid, Brake ..........................................381 , 383
Fluids And Lubricants ........................... 379 , 382
Fog Lights ........................................................53
Fold-Flat Seats .................................................34
11
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 479
480
Forward Collision Warning
.............................136
Four Wheel Drive ................................. 196 , 205
Operation ..................................................196
System ......................................................196
Four Wheel Drive Operation ...........................196
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ...............................281
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................311
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................351
Fuel ...............................................................373
Adding .......................................................257
Additives ...................................................374
Clean Air ....................................................374
Economy Mode ..........................................190
Ethanol ......................................................375
Gasoline ....................................................373
Light ..........................................................110
Materials Added ........................................374
Methanol ...................................................375
Octane Rating ...............373 , 374, 379, 382
Requirements ...........................................373
Tank Capacity .................................. 377 , 378
Fueling...........................................................257
Fuses .............................................................292
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .................... 78
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................373
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................374
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................374
Gear Ranges ..................................................191
General Information ...................................... 476
Glass Cleaning .............................................. 371
Glove Compartment Storage ...........................83
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 261
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 260
GVWR............................................................ 259
H
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 281
Head Restraints ...............................................41
Head Rests ......................................................41
Headlight Washers ..........................................58
Headlights
Cleaning ................................................... 368
Delay ...........................................................52
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........51
Lights On Reminder .....................................53
On With Wipers ............................................52
Passing ........................................................52
Switch..........................................................50
Washers ......................................................58
Heated Mirrors .................................................49
Heated Seats ...................................................39
Heated Steering Wheel ............................. 44 , 45
Heater, Engine Block .................................... 185
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 125
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 125
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 126
Hitches
Trailer Towing
........................................... 262
Hood
Closing .........................................................74
Opening .......................................................73
Hood Prop ........................................................73
Hood Release ...................................................73
I
Ignition
.............................................................18
Switch ..........................................................18
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide
......................................13
Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 46 , 281
Instrument Cluster ...........................................93
Descriptions.............................................. 115
Display .........................................................94
Engine Oil Reset ..........................................95
Menu Items .................................................98
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 370
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 370
Interior Lights ...................................................53
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................56
Introduction .....................................................10
Inverter
Power
...........................................................88
iPod Control .................................................. 451
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ........................ 428 , 451
Bluetooth Streaming Audio ....................... 451
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 480
481
J
Jack Location
.................................................299
Jack Operation ............................ 298 , 300, 351
Jacking Instructions .......................................300
Jump Starting ................................................305
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
.......................................... 25
Disarm The System ..................................... 25
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 17, 23
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry)
................................... 16
Key Fob Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry)
................................... 17
Key-In Reminder .............................................. 19
Keyless Enter-N-Go .......................................... 27
Passive Entry ............................................... 27
Keys................................................................. 14
Replacement ........................................ 17 , 23
L
Lane Change Assist ......................................... 53
LaneSense ....................................................252
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................145
Latches..........................................................180
Hood ........................................................... 73
Lead Free Gasoline ........................................373
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................180
Life Of Tires ...................................................360
Liftgate ............................................................74
Closing.........................................................75
Opening .......................................................74
Power ..........................................................75
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................58
Light Bulbs .................................................... 180
Lights ............................................................ 180
Air Bag ............................................. 153 , 178
Ambient .......................................................54
Automatic Headlights ..................................52
Brake Assist Warning ............................... 124
Brake Warning .......................................... 106
Bulb Replacement .................................... 286
Courtesy/Reading .......................................54
Cruise .............................................. 114 , 116
Daytime Running .........................................51
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................55
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator ............................................... 108
Exterior ...............................................50 , 180
Fog ..............................................................53
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 281
Headlights On With Wipers ..........................52
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................51
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 125
Interior.........................................................53
Lights On Reminder .....................................53
Low Fuel ................................................... 110
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 111
Map .............................................................54
Park ................................................... 52 , 114
Passing ........................................................52
Reading .......................................................54
Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 109
Security Alarm .......................................... 109
Service...................................................... 286
Side Marker .............................................. 290
Traction Control ........................................ 124
Turn Signals .....................53 , 115, 180, 290
Vanity Mirror ................................................49
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................................108 , 115
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ..................... 104
Load Shed Battery Saver On ......................... 104
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ........... 104
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............ 104
Loading Vehicle ............................................. 258
Tires.......................................................... 356
Locks
Automatic Door
............................................31
Child Protection ...........................................31
Power Door ..................................................27
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 340
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 372
Luggage Carrier ................................................88
M
Maintenance .............................................70 , 73
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 331
Maintenance Schedule ........................ 316 , 320
11
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 481
482
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine)
.................................... 111 , 118
Manual
Service ......................................................475
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .................... 32
Memory Seat ................................................... 32
Memory Settings ............................................. 32
Methanol .......................................................375
Mirrors ............................................................. 46
Automatic Dimming ..................................... 46
Electric Remote ........................................... 48
Exterior Folding ........................................... 47
Heated ........................................................49
Outside........................................................47
Rearview ............................................46 , 281
Vanity .......................................................... 49
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................12
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......................138
Mopar Parts ...................................................474
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................ 51
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
..........................185
O
Occupant Restraints
......................................143
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 373 , 374
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................335
Oil Filter, Selection .........................................335
Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 108
Oil Reset ..........................................................95
Oil, Engine...................................332 , 379, 382
Capacity........................................... 377 , 378
Change Interval ........................................ 332
Checking................................................... 331
Disposal ................................................... 334
Filter .......................................335 , 379, 382
Filter Disposal ........................................... 334
Identification Logo .................................... 333
Materials Added To .................................. 334
Pressure Warning Light ............................ 108
Recommendation ...................333 , 377, 378
Synthetic .................................................. 334
Viscosity ................................. 334 , 377, 378
Onboard Diagnostic System .......................... 117
Operating Precautions .................................. 117
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ..................................11 , 475
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................47
Overhead Console ...........................................85
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 308
P
Paddle Shifters
............................................. 195
Paint Care ..................................................... 368
Parking Brake ............................................... 186
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 241
ParkSense System, Rear ..................... 228 , 234
Passive Entry ...................................................27
Performance Features .................................. 100
Pets............................................................... 177
Pinch Protection ........................................70 , 73
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 356
Power
Brakes
...................................................... 372
Distribution Center (Fuses) ....................... 293
Door Locks...................................................27
Inverter ........................................................88
Mirrors .........................................................48
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .................85
Seats ...........................................................37
Steering .................................................... 209
Sunroof .................................................69 , 71
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column ................45
Windows ......................................................67
Power Seats
Forward
.......................................................37
Rearward .....................................................37
Recline.........................................................38
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 149
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 299
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 149
Q
Quadra-Lift
.................................................... 201
Quadra-Trac .........................................196 , 197
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 482
483
R
Radial Ply Tires
..............................................358
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............347
Radio
Presets
......................................................421
Radio Operation .................................. 420 , 463
Radio Remote Controls ..................................451
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 57
Rear Axle (Differential) ...................................351
Rear Camera .................................................255
Rear Cross Path .............................................134
Rear Cupholders .............................................. 85
Rear ParkSense System ...................... 228 , 234
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................58
Rearview Mirror ............................................... 46
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 35
Recreational Towing ......................................271
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................374
Refrigerant ....................................................338
Release, Hood ................................................. 73
Reminder, Seat Belt ......................................144
Remote Control
Starting System
........................................... 20
Remote Keyless Entry ......................................15
Arm The Alarm ............................................. 25
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 25
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 17, 23
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........451
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode
.............................. 21
Remote Starting System ..................................20
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 286
Replacement Keys ....................................17 , 23
Replacement Tires ........................................ 360
Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 474
Restraints, Child ........................................... 162
Restraints, Head ..............................................41
Retractable Cargo Area Cover ..........................77
Roll Over Warning ............................................11
Roof Luggage Rack ..........................................88
Rotation, Tires .............................................. 366
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 178
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ..................... 180
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 474
Safety Information, Tire ................................ 352
Safety Tips .................................................... 177
Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 178
Schedule, Maintenance ....................... 316 , 320
Seat Belt Reminder ....................................... 109
Seat Belts ............................................ 144 , 178
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 148
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 148
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ............................................ 148
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 150
Child Restraints ........................................ 162
Energy Management Feature ................... 150
Extender ................................................... 149
Front Seat ...............................144 , 145, 147
Inspection ................................................. 178
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 147
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 148
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................... 145
Operating Instructions .............................. 147
Pregnant Women ...................................... 149
Pretensioners ........................................... 149
Rear Seat.................................................. 145
Reminder .................................................. 144
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 149
Seat Belt Pretensioner .............................. 149
Untwisting Procedure ................................ 148
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................ 370
Seats..................................................34 , 37, 39
Adjustment ...........................................34 , 37
Easy Entry ....................................................38
Head Restraints ...........................................41
Heated .........................................................39
Rear Folding ................................................34
Reclining ......................................................35
Seatback Release ........................................34
Tilting ...........................................................34
Vented .........................................................40
Ventilated ....................................................40
Security Alarm ........................................ 24 , 109
Arm The System ...........................................25
Disarm The System ......................................25
Selec-Terrain ................................................. 205
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ......... 379, 382
11
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 483
484
Sentry Key
Key Programming
........................................ 23
Sentry Key Replacement .......................... 17 , 23
Service Assistance .........................................472
Service Contract ............................................473
Service Manuals ............................................475
Shifting ..........................................................188
Automatic Transmission .................. 188 , 190
Shoulder Belts ...............................................145
Signals, Turn ............................... 115 , 180, 290
Siri .................................................................469
Sirius Satellite Radio .....................................422
Favorites ...................................................424
Replay .......................................................423
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
..........................................424
Favorites ...................................................424
Replay .......................................................423
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ................... 364 , 365
Snow Plow .....................................................270
Snow Tires .....................................................361
Spare Tires ................................. 299 , 362, 363
Spark Plugs ......................................... 379 , 382
Speed Control
Accel/Decel
..................................... 213 , 214
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) .............................218
Cancel .......................................................214
Resume .....................................................214
Set.............................................................213
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ............ 212, 214
Starting ......................................................... 181
Button .........................................................18
Cold Weather ............................................ 185
Engine Block Heater ................................. 185
Engine Fails To Start ................................. 184
Remote........................................................20
Starting And Operating .................................. 181
Starting Procedures ...................................... 181
Steering
Power
....................................................... 209
Tilt Column ...........................................44 , 45
Wheel, Heated ......................................44 , 45
Wheel, Tilt.............................................44 , 45
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..................... 451
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls
............................................ 451
Storage ............................................................83
Console .......................................................84
Door ............................................................84
Glove Compartment ....................................83
Sunglasses ..................................................88
Storage Bin ......................................................77
Storage, Vehicle ......................................66 , 368
Store Radio Presets ...................................... 421
Storing Your Vehicle ...................................... 368
Sun Roof ..................................... 69 , 70, 71, 73
Closing..................................................70 , 72
Opening ................................................69 , 71
Venting .................................................70 , 73
Sun Visor .........................................................50
Sunglasses Storage .........................................88
Sunshade Operation .................................70 , 72
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 128
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 334
System, Remote Starting .................................20
T
Telescoping Steering Column
....................44 , 45
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............65
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................78
Tilt Steering Column ..................................44 , 45
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 356
Tire Markings ................................................ 352
Tire Safety Information .................................. 352
Tires .................................. 180 , 356, 362, 366
Aging (Life Of Tires) ................................... 360
Air Pressure .............................................. 356
Chains ............................................. 364 , 365
Changing ................................298 , 305, 351
Compact Spare ......................................... 362
Flat Changing ............................................ 305
General Information ........................356 , 362
High Speed ............................................... 358
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 357
Jacking............................................. 298 , 351
Life Of Tires .............................................. 360
Load Capacity ........................................... 356
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
.........................................112 , 138
Quality Grading ......................................... 366
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 484
485
Radial
........................................................358
Replacement ................................... 305 , 360
Rotation ....................................................366
Safety .............................................. 352 , 356
Sizes..........................................................353
Snow Tires .................................................361
Spare Tires ............................. 299 , 362, 363
Spinning ....................................................359
Trailer Towing ............................................268
Tread Wear Indicators ...............................359
Wheel Mounting ........................................305
Wheel Nut Torque .....................................372
To Open Hood .................................................. 73
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .......................266
Tow Hooks
Emergency
................................................314
Towing ................................................. 260 , 312
Disabled Vehicle ........................................312
Guide............................................... 263 , 264
Recreational ..............................................271
Weight ............................................. 263 , 264
Towing Behind A Motorhome .........................271
Traction Control .............................................128
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .............................128
Trailer Towing ................................................260
Cooling System Tips ..................................270
Hitches ......................................................262
Minimum Requirements ............................267
Tips........................................................... 269
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 266
Wiring ....................................................... 268
Trailer Towing Guide ............................ 263 , 264
Trailer Weight ....................................... 263 , 264
Transfer Case ............................................... 351
Fluid ................................................ 381 , 383
Maintenance ............................................ 351
Transmission ................................................ 190
Automatic ........................................ 190 , 350
Fluid ................................................ 381 , 383
Maintenance ............................................ 350
Shifting ..................................................... 188
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener
(Homelink)
.......................................................78
Transporting Pets .......................................... 177
Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 359
Trip Computer ............................................... 105
Turn Signals .................................. 53 , 115, 290
U
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity
.................. 445
Phone Call Features ................................. 442
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone ................................... 446
Uconnect Phone .........................438 , 440, 441
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress
..................... 444
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress ................ 444
Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 447
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name ........... 443
Call Continuation ...................................... 445
Call Controls ............................................. 443
Call Termination ....................................... 445
Cancel Command ..................................... 438
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between
The Uconnect Phone And Mobile
Phone
................................................... 446
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
..... 441
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device ............ 441
Dial By Saying A Number .......................... 443
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device ... 441
Far End Audio Performance ...................... 446
Help Command ......................................... 438
Join Calls .................................................. 445
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite
................................................ 441
Making A Second Call While Current
Call Is In Progress
................................. 445
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 442
Natural Speech ......................................... 438
Operation .................................................. 437
11
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 485
486
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
...................................................438
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device ...................................................440
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ..................440
Phonebook Download ...............................441
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............444
Power-Up ...................................................447
Recent Calls ..............................................443
Redial ........................................................445
To Remove A Favorite ...............................442
Toggling Between Calls .............................445
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................443
Transfer Call To And From Mobile
Phone
...................................................445
Voice Command ........................................446
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ....................443
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ............. 27
Passive Entry Programming ......................... 27
Uconnect Voice Command ............................ 465
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 366
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....78
Universal Transmitter ......................................78
Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 373
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 148
V
Vanity Mirrors ..................................................49
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 372
Vehicle Loading ............................................ 258
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................12
Vehicle Storage .......................................66 , 368
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help
............................................13
Navigation ...................................................13
Operating Instructions .................................13
Searching User Guide ..................................13
Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................................... 334
Voice Recognition System (VR) ..................... 465
W
Warning Flashers, Hazard ............................. 281
Warning Lights (Instrument
Cluster Descriptions) ..................................... 110
Warnings And Cautions ....................................12
Warnings, Roll Over ..........................................11
Warranty Information .................................... 474
Washers, Headlight ..........................................58
Washers, Windshield ............................. 55 , 331
Washing Vehicle ............................................ 369
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 363
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 363
Wind Buffeting ...................................69 , 70, 72
Window Fogging ...............................................66
Windows
Power
...........................................................67
Windshield Defroster .................................... 179
Windshield Washers .............................. 55 , 331
Fluid.......................................................... 331
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 341
Windshield Wipers ...........................................55
Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 341
Wipers, Intermittent .........................................56
Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................57
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 486
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_WK_OM_EN_USC_N
Third Edition V1
2020 GRAND CHEROKEE
2020 GRAND CHEROKEE
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
